JP2019048164A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving prize winning exceeding a prescribed number of pieces of prize winning by one advantageous game and hence enhancing interest in a specific game state.SOLUTION: Performance execution means can continuously display an initial indication even after completion of one round game after performing an initial indication of a scheduled number of winning balls determined from among a plurality of kinds of scheduled number of winning balls in start of a specific game state for display regarding the number of winning balls based on entry into a variable winning device in the specific game state, and can execute a cumulative addition display performance for adding a different scheduled number of winning balls to the initial indication in a round game executed after execution of the initial indication. The cumulative addition display performance can execute a first cumulative addition display performance for adding a first scheduled number of winning balls, and can execute a second cumulative addition display performance for adding a second scheduled number of winning balls larger than the first scheduled number of winning balls in a round game after execution of the first cumulative addition display performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  For example, a pachinko gaming machine is shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state or the like) which is advantageous to a player by winning (passing) a game medium such as a game ball to a predetermined area provided on a game board It is determined whether or not to be, and when it is determined that the result of the determination is that the transition is made, the state is shifted to the specific gaming state.

  In the specific gaming state, when the variable winning device is in the easy winning state (opened state) as a plurality of advantageous games (round game etc.), and the gaming medium is won in the variable winning device in the easy winning state, A game value such as a medium is given. The variable winning device ends one advantageous game and enters a prize difficult state (closed state) when a predetermined number of gaming media in a predetermined number win.

  Also, as a conventional gaming machine of this type, the variable winning device can be repeatedly made into a winning difficult state and an easy winning state multiple times in one advantageous game in a specific gaming state, and the number of repetitions is specified It has been proposed that the expected winning number of game media which can be expected be different each time an advantageous game is executed, by defining the condition to be different according to the type of the game state (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-272317 A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game can not be enhanced so much.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, on condition that game media has passed through the passage area;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means;
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which game media can be easily received and a closed state in which the game medium is more difficult to receive than the open state;
Effect pattern determination means for determining an effect pattern based on the specific gaming state to be transferred by the gaming state transfer means;
Effect execution means for executing an effect in the specific gaming state based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a round game to open and close the variable winning device a plurality of times,
The effect executing means is a scheduled award determined from among a plurality of types of scheduled award ball numbers at the start of the specific game state, regarding the display regarding the number of winning balls based on the winning on the variable winning device in the specific game state. After the initial display of the number of balls is performed, even after one round game is over, the initial display can be continued and displayed,
In the round game executed after executing the initial display, it is possible to execute a cumulative addition display effect of adding different scheduled award ball numbers to the initial display,
The cumulative addition display effect is a first cumulative addition display effect for adding a first scheduled award ball number, and a round game after the first cumulative addition display effect is executed, the first scheduled award ball A second cumulative addition display effect of adding a second scheduled prize ball number larger than the number is executable.

A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A launcher capable of launching game media;
A game board having a game area in which game media launched by the launching means can roll;
A first passage area provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the second passing area;
A displacement member displaceable in a first mode in which the passage of game media is facilitated with respect to the second passage area and a second mode in which it is difficult;
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the advancing speed of the game media flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the progression of game media flowing into the displacement member A suppression unit that does not suppress the velocity more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific gaming state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area;
Specific gaming state control means that can be controlled to a specific gaming state on condition that a determination result to shift to a specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one advantageous game of displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state;
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of gaming media have passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be introduced.
The advantageous game execution means becomes the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be ejected by the ejection means and to pass through the second passage area during the execution of the advantageous game. After making the displacement member into the first mode for the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time in the second mode is the sum of the second time and the first number. The second aspect of the invention is characterized in that the second number of game media, which exceeds the number, can be controlled to be time to be emitted by the emission means and to flow into the displacement member.

  According to such a configuration, for example, in one advantageous game, the first number of game media in which the first time the displacement member is in the first mode is less than the specified number is fired and the second passing area Control the time required to pass through, and then the second time that the displacement member is in the second mode, the second number (the number with the first number exceeds the specified number) Control is performed so that it is time for game media to flow into the displacement member. In this case, when the displacing member becomes the first aspect next time, the number of game media (the sum of the first number and the second number) greater than the specified number is combined with the first aspect. Since it is guided to the two-passing area, passing (winning) of gaming media exceeding the specified number can be realized in one advantageous game, and consequently, the interest to the specific gaming state can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to realize the number of passes exceeding the specified number only by appropriately controlling the second time of the displacement member in one advantageous game.

The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
A third passage area provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A variable member capable of changing between the first mode in which the passage of game media is facilitated with respect to the third passing area and the second mode in which it is difficult;
The gaming value giving unit is capable of giving a gaming value on condition that gaming media has passed through the third passing area,
The advantageous game execution means is
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least once a first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific gaming state;
And second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific gaming state.
After executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game in the specific gaming state, the other can be executed,
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means is characterized by ending on condition that a prescribed number of gaming media have passed through the third passage area.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the execution of the second advantageous game which may exceed the specified number and the execution of the first advantageous game which may not exceed the specified number may be easy to pass through the game media. It can be easily recognized only by confirming the second and third passage areas.

The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The specific gaming state is
A first specified gaming state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is a predetermined time,
The second specified game state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is longer than the predetermined time is included.

  According to such a configuration, the first specified gaming state in which the predetermined time is set for the second time in the second mode without changing the first time for the displacement member in the first mode. By providing a second specific gaming state in which the time is longer than that, it is possible to make the gaming value given based on the number of passes (the number of winnings) different according to the second time in the second mode. These advantages can be differentiated for the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The specific gaming state is
After making the displacement member the first mode for the first time in the at least one advantageous game, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time which is the second mode is The displacement member may be controlled so that it is time for the second number of game media to be ejected by the launcher and flow into the displacement member, and the displacement member is the one before the execution of at least one advantageous game. It is characterized in that it includes a specific gaming state that can be controlled such that the time of two modes is the time for which the number of gaming media exceeding the specified number is shot by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. I assume.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the passing exceeding the specified number by controlling the second time in which the displacement member is in the second mode during the advantageous game, and the displacement before the execution of the advantageous game Since it is possible to provide a specific gaming state that includes both of the advantageous game capable of realizing passing exceeding the specified number by controlling the time during which the member is in the second aspect, it is possible to further enhance the interest to the specific gaming state It can be further enhanced.

The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
In the specific game state, the number of game value awards provided by the game value award unit per game medium that has passed the second passage area, and the number of times of execution of the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution unit A scheduled grant amount for determining a scheduled grant amount of gaming value in a specific gaming state, based on the first passing time and the scheduled number of passing gaming media that may pass through the second passing area according to the first time and the second time. Decision means,
The present invention is characterized by further comprising: notification means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned granted quantity determined by the planned granted quantity determination means.

  According to such a configuration, the number of game value awards provided each time a game medium passes through the second passage area, the number of times of execution of the advantageous game, and the displacement member become the first aspect and the second aspect. Based on the planned number of passes of gaming media that can pass through the second passing area according to the first time and the second time, the planned granted quantity of gaming value in the specific gaming state is determined, and at least the scheduled Since it is possible to notify a part of the quantity, it is possible to give notice of novel contents rich in surprise and diversity as to what degree of gaming value is given in the specific gaming state, and thus the specific gaming state Can increase the interest for

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

It is an appearance perspective view of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an enlarged perspective view of an essential part of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the specifications of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a view showing a one round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the superimposition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol determination processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement timing relevant to the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows 1 round opening-and-closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a hit end interval management process of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine additional bonus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows 1 round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for bonus bonus pattern selection for the game machine top which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st modification of a big winning opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the game board and the 2nd modification of a variable winning a prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd modification of a variable winning prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a right view which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a left side view showing a variable winning prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the drive unit of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a part of drive unit of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a front view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus concerning the other example of the 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus concerning the other example of the 5th modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described using FIGS. 1 to 5.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a main frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a board 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) capable of visually recognizing the game board 1 And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Comprises a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably mounted, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 at the rear (the counter player side) of the main body frame 2 Have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. In addition, while the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 in FIG. 1, the state which the main body frame 2 was closed with respect to the outer frame 6 is shown, and in this state, a back frame is Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame component members include the protective glass 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (the top decoration 14, the right decorative member 15, the left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a front frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the front frame 3 are contained. Further, in the pan unit 8, respective cover members (upper pan top cover 8a, lower pan cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3 h (window portion) provided on the front frame base plate 3 a provided on the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3 a When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2, the front frame 3 faces the front (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the front (front) side. At the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h for producing effects by sound.

  Moreover, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decoration member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a playing card later described is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and light emitting display modes are provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. The right decorative member 15 (for example, the upper right lens 15a, the right middle lens 15b, the right panel cover 15c, etc.) and the left decorative member 16 (for example, the left outer lens 16a) that can be changed are provided.

  Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later are provided (see FIG. 6) . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 and is detected from the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as an aesthetically pleasing light or diffused light, for example. Thereby, since it is possible to change the display mode by the light, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a dish unit 8 is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3 h of the front frame base plate 3 a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing lending balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 and capable of storing, for example, gaming balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing gaming balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper tray 17 includes an upper tray main body 17p capable of storing gaming balls, and an upper tray upper cover 8a removably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper tray main body 17p. An upper plate decoration member is provided to improve the appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper dish decoration member, the upper dish main body 17p is provided with an upper dish left decoration 17a, an upper dish front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper dish upper cover 8a. In the upper plate upper cover 8a, it is bent from the left side to the lower side through the front side and from the middle toward the right side to the lower plate 18.

  A payout opening 20 for paying out gaming balls to the upper plate 17 and a discharge opening for discharging gaming balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a (not shown) And a supply port 21 for supplying the lower plate 18 with gaming balls discharged from the discharge port. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage cover (shown in FIG. 6) is configured to communicate the ball passage of the game ball dispensed from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and the discharge port and the supply port 21. ) Is provided. When the gaming ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the gaming ball is sent to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20, but the upper portion of the gaming sphere is retained near the payout opening 20 although the gaming ball is paid out. Is full, or when the ball release button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged through the ball passage and the lower plate via the supply port 21. Sent to 18

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used to decorate the front of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used to decorate the front portion 17c of the upper tray 17. By using the plating member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the player's interest.

  In addition to a return button 24 for returning a card from the card lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a card unit 84 for lending a gaming ball not shown (see FIG. 6), etc. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game of. Although the arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, the pressing operation button 9A is vertically projected from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the drawing as an example, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

  As for the front frame 3, among the front surface (front surface), a portion on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, an illegal piano wire or the like It is possible to assume that a fraudulent action by the fraudulent member is performed on various components built on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion by infiltrating the member.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a cover member (not shown) with a wire holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at the portion where the intruding act by the illegal member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding a wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) formed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function that has the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, so it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 includes a main body frame base plate 2 a and various main body frame components provided to the main body frame base plate 2 a. The main body frame constituent members include the launcher 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main frame 2, a main frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3 h is provided at a predetermined position of the main frame base plate 2 a facing the above front frame opening 3 h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, on the lower right side of the main body frame opening portion, a launch device 26 for launching game balls is provided.

  The launcher 26 includes a panel 26a for disposing the launcher 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launch handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel 26a, and a panel 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a opposite to the rear surface side of the main frame 2 and comprises a launch drive device (not shown) for launching game balls.

  In the lower right side of the front frame 3, a notch 3p for exposing the launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) to the player side is provided. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launcher 26 (panel body 26 a, the launch handle 26 b) is exposed through the notch 3 p of the front frame 3 and adjacent to the above-described tray unit 8. Be positioned. Such a launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) and the tray unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were integrated with one another in series.

  The launch handle 26b is rotatably mounted on a support portion (not shown) and the support portion, and is provided in a handle grip 26d which can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, and provided in the support portion. Stop control switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the shutter, a release stop button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) for turning the release stop switch ON / OFF, and a handle arranged to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d And a cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the discharge handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the drive force of the discharge drive is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotational angle), and the drive force at that time stores in the upper tray 17. The game ball being shot is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1 p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to fire 90.9 game balls per minute by the firing drive device, and one game ball can be fired approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for resiliently urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times, and the player can adjust the spring member to the elasticity. By rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction, the game ball is fired.

  Also, when the player interrupts the game and releases his hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the firing stop button 26e is pressed by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, whereby the firing of the gaming ball is stopped.

  As a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the gaming ball in the launching device 26, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as another launch device, it is linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. It may be provided with a firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for rolling up (tightening) the firing spring. In such a launcher, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launch handle, thereby strengthening or weakening the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring. Can increase or decrease the launch intensity of the

  The speaker 10 c is provided at the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to perform effects by sound. A sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through a speaker cover 10k provided at a portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, a portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game balls can roll down. doing. In addition, although the game board 1 is formed by the material (for example, polycarbonate etc.) which has translucency, you may be formed by the material which does not have translucency like a plywood etc., for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, and the second start opening 33. Wing member 34, passing gate 35, big winning opening 37, large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the big winning opening 37, plural general winning openings 40, out opening 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect member 42B , The cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the passing gate 35, the special winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40 form a passing area through which game balls can pass. . The special winning opening shutter 37A is a displacing member that can be displaced between the first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passing area (big winning hole 37) and the second mode in which the game ball is in the hard closing state. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as parts or parts constituting the variable winning device.

  The first guide rail 30 is disposed to extend generally from the left to the upper center toward the game board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper portion of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The second guide rail 30 'is disposed so as to extend generally from the upper right to the lower right toward the gaming board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30C and an inner rail 30D. The outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are for guiding the game balls from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the big winning opening 37 disposed at the lower right side. On the surface where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are opposed to each other, a plurality of convex portions 30E capable of coming into contact with the game balls flowing down through between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals. There is. As a result, the game balls flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'are repeatedly abutted against the convex portions 30E while being released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', and thus the progress is suppressed. By reaching the mouth 37, the progressing speed of the gaming ball is effectively decelerated. The lower end of the second guide rail 30 'is located near the upper right portion of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). Thereby, the game balls discharged from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'abut against the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 described later, and then roll along the upper surface 43a toward the large winning opening 37 It moves with. In addition, although the form arrange | positioned at equal intervals along the direction which guides a game ball, the convex part 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex part 30E of inner rail 30D mutually oppose in FIG. 3 is shown, These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions mutually offset along the direction of guiding the gaming balls.

  The stage 31 is for distributing the flow-through area of the game balls in the game area 1 p and is disposed along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball fired by the launch device 26 flows downward toward the lower part of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or the stage 31 or the like which is driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning in any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the large winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40. When passing through the gate 35 and not winning thereafter, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  In addition, winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or entering into the passing area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the passage area or enters the passage area to give an advantageous situation (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) to the player. Means In this case, passage of the passing area by the gaming ball means simple passing, and entering of the passing region by the gaming ball means collecting the gaming ball separately from the out port 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passage and entering are substantially equivalent. Therefore, since both passage of the game ball to the passage area and entry of the ball lead to winning, in the following description, it is unified by "winning" unless otherwise noted.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26 b is relatively small, the gaming balls flow down mainly on the left side of the stage 31 because the striking power given to the gaming balls is generally small. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the game ball flows down the right side of the stage 31 or flows along the second guide rail 30 'because the launch force given to the game balls is generally large. . In general, how to strike the game ball on the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-hand strike", and how to strike the game ball on the right side of the stage 31 and along the second guide rail 30 ' It is called right-handed.

  The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 trigger a lottery under the condition that the game ball is winning (passing), and the result of the lottery is displayed on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4 Give an opportunity to

  The first starting opening 32 is provided generally at the lower position at the center of the game board 1. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided immediately below the first start port 32. When a game ball is won in the second starting opening 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. In the second starting opening 33, the difficulty of winning is determined by the blade member 34 as a normal motorized part. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The wing members 34 open and close in the forward and backward directions of the game board 1 in the forward and backward directions, and an open state enabling the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33, and the second It is a so-called ordinary electric winning combination that switches between the closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball in the starting opening 33. The wing member 34 is driven by a wing member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  It should be noted that the ordinary motor winning combination is not limited to one operating the wing member 34 so as to open and close in the front and rear direction, for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is expanded by rotating in the left and right direction of the game board 1 It may be a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of the game ball on the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball is won on the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The big winning opening 37 is opened in a hit gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 37 is located on the lower right side of the game area 1 p, and is provided generally to the right of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The position where the special winning opening 37 is disposed is not limited to the above-described position, and can be appropriately changed according to the specification of the gaming machine.

  The special winning opening 37 is an opening having a relatively large dimension in the left-right direction so that a plurality of gaming balls can be simultaneously winning. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an opening between the front of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in the closing state. It becomes.

  The special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The dimension in the short direction of the special winning opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the gaming ball. The special winning opening shutter 37A is provided to be able to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the gaming board 1. The state in which the special winning opening shutter 37A protrudes to the front of the game board 1 is a closing state in which the large winning opening 37 is closed, and the state in which the game board 1 is retracted backward is an opening state in which the special winning opening 37 is open . The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A has a relatively gentle downward slope to the left in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is arranged to face the large winning opening shutter 37A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43a connected to the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, a front end guide 43b, and an opening 43c corresponding to the big winning opening 37. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'to the right end of the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) Make a slope of the trend. The upper surface 43a is arranged to support a plurality of gaming balls discharged from the second guide rail 30 'and to guide it to the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end. The front end guide portion 43b is a standing wall and is formed to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can contact the gaming ball are provided at predetermined intervals. Also, on the front appropriate portion of the game board 1 facing the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 1d that can be in contact with the game balls are provided at predetermined intervals. The convex portions 1 d of the game board 1 and the convex portions 43 d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions mutually offset along the traveling direction of the game ball. Thus, the game balls rolling along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly contact alternately with the convex portions 1d and 43d while moving to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). At this time, the progress of the game ball is effectively decelerated before passing the big winning opening 37 (big winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the large winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which gaming balls can flow when the large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, and suppress the progress of the flowing gaming balls. The suppression portion 430 is formed. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43 c is disposed at a position corresponding to the large winning opening shutter 37 A, and forms the large winning opening 37. At a portion of the game board 1 located inside such a cover member 43, a ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a special winning opening count switch 370 are provided. The game ball dropped from the open special winning opening 37 is guided to the large winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a winning by the large winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation of the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

  One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 40, although a lottery is not performed, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 to be described later, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the non-probability change / non-time-short game state and the special symbol lottery There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming status) that is higher than the non-time saving gaming status, and a short gaming state when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non probability variation / non-time gaming status, special symbols in the normal gaming status When the lottery is won, it shifts to the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state).

  In the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state, and therefore the winning of the second starting opening 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade members 34 as the normal electric throws. This state is a state called so-called "power support", and it becomes easy to store the holding balls of the special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning in the second starting opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving gaming state 1), the state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving gaming state 2 ), The opening time of the wing member 34 as a motorized part normally means at least one of the relatively long states (time saving gaming state 3). For example, the time saving game state also includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time short game state 3 simultaneously progress with any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, transition to a definite change / short time gaming state (a normal change gaming state which is a positive change gaming state and a short time gaming state) without fail, a non probability change / non short time gaming state (non probability change gaming state And it does not shift to the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations (number of games) of the special symbol game reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the probability variation / time saving gaming state, the normal gaming which is the non-probability variation gaming state and the non time shortening gaming state It is supposed to move to the state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, triggered by the fact that 10 special symbol lottery (10 times of the special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the probability variation / time reduction gaming state , Transition to non-probability · non-time saving gaming state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, until it shifts to the next big hit gaming state, it may be made to maintain the probability variation / time saving gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state ending by performing the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times as in this embodiment will also be described as ST (Specia 1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 at the time of non-operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing specific effects. Is located in The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs rotation operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

  The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each gaming state and the lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2) A special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided. Although not illustrated, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) disposed on the game board 1 etc. includes the one corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state is normally determined It lights up (or blinks) when a superimposed character described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a part of the special symbol in the gaming state or in the big hit gaming state.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not the second starting port 33 is opened by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric role when the gaming ball has won the passage gate 35 as a trigger. It displays the lottery result for the game. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 is capable of, for example, red lighting and blue lighting, and lights in red when winning in the normal symbol game, and lights in blue when losing in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a lighting mode of red, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 33 is permitted. In addition, as a lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used, for example, it becomes a lighting state or blink state in the case of winning, while it becomes the extinguishing state in the case of losing You may

  In the normal symbol holding display unit 52, a new gaming ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. In the case of having performed, the number of executable times of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol held to perform the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 after the next time is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display unit 51, and are arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524, for example, when the number of holds is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 turn on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 turn off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 light.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 32 and The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as the stopping symbol according to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 33, The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 33 is displayed as a stop symbol relating to the second special symbol.

  The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like by repeating lighting and extinguishing each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (pattern) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol are different from each other. The first special symbol is a symbol serving as a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and there is a big hit symbol such as “provisional change 1” indicating transition to the probability changing gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. (See Figure 7). As a hit symbol of the second special symbol, it is a symbol that becomes a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and shows that it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, such as "probability 1"-"prone variation 6" There is a big hit symbol of and a small hit symbol such as "small hit" which becomes a transition opportunity to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 7). That is, there is no small hit symbol that triggers transition to the small hit gaming state in the first special symbol, and the small hit that triggers transition to the small hit gaming state in the second special symbol hit symbol. There is a pattern. In addition, the 1st special symbol display part 53 and the 2nd special symbol display part 54 are not limited to 7 segment LED etc. For example, it may be based on combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554. Or, for the first special symbol variation display for the next and subsequent special symbol games when the new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is the variation display of the symbols for the special symbol game The number of executable times (number of holdings) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended for the variation display of symbols for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variation display of symbols for the special symbol game. The number of executable times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is arranged side by side vertically, and is located above the normal symbol hold display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holdings by the normal symbol holding display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are connected to the first starting opening 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying variable. The game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the communicating ball passage or the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting hole 33 If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 which has been suspended is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the first start opening 32 The number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 during variation is the main RAM 63 (see FIG. Information of the first special symbol game for 4 times stored as starting memory (starting memory information) in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) of 6) is held as the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) to 1st special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage. Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game, when held for four times, information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( Information on the second special symbol game stored for four times in the 0) as a start memory and held as a start memory in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) It is memorized. Therefore, the number of prize holdings for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, is a maximum of eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 Alternatively, the suspension of the winning on the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of the winning on the second starting opening 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lighted while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number related to a round game (round game) described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, and 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, and 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "16R"). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592, 593 are turned off. Do. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the whole number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or an ordinal number indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. The number of rounds is, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R" when the former is meant, and "16th round" or "the 16th R", for example, when the latter is meant. In the following description, "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

  The liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed behind the gaming board 1 as shown in FIG. 3, and the display area 4A is disposed substantially at the center of the display panel 4 so that the player can visually recognize it. Other than the result of the hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting opening 33, various images related to the game, for example identification symbol for effect, effect image in normal game state, effect in big hit game state An image, an effect image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to perform the fluctuation display of the identification information on condition that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 constitute notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 which is a read only memory, a main RAM 63 which is a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. Is equipped. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processing in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 62.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start opening switch 320 disposed behind the first start opening 32. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start opening switch 320 and the second start opening switch 330 are determined to have won when the game ball has entered the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, and thus the predetermined detection signal is set. It supplies the main control circuit 60.

  A pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won in the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display section 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to make the player know that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may

  The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 noting that winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the passage gate 35. Thus, the passing gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, the payout device 83 performs a predetermined number of winning balls.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a large winning opening count switch 370 disposed below the large winning opening 37. The special winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of gaming balls as a winning ball, and lowers the upper tray 17 or lower via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. Pay out on the plate 18. The special winning opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the gaming ball passes through the special winning opening 37.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving the special winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the special winning opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can win the winning hole 37 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. The opening drive of the special winning opening 37 by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54, and in the big hit gaming state It takes place when it is migrated.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the gaming ball is put in the second starting opening 33 It will be easier.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state which is not the short time gaming state (in the present embodiment "non-probability change / non-short time gaming state") is 0/257. Will not be released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving gaming state) is, for example, 257/257, and when it is won, the wing member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, the number of normal symbols to be hit symbols in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number to be an upper limit when the second starting opening 33 is open is 10 (10).

  When the first starting opening switch 320 detects a game ball when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the first special symbol hold display unit 55 variably, the first special symbol hold display unit 55 1) The first special symbol based on winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is held, that is, the number of held according to the first special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the first special symbol is started.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 56 is a second special start symbol switch unit 330 when the game ball is detected while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is fluctuatingly displayed. 1 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is put on hold, that is, the held number relating to the second special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. . The corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning according to the winning order for the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33.

  In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of reservations for which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, as described above, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 controls the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 The number of pending displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, up to 4 each. (Ie, the number of times of detection is 4), and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of reservations. Under the present circumstances, when the number of reservations reduces by completion | finish of the fluctuation display of a special symbol, the number of reservations is again added by making four pieces into an upper limit.

  When the number of pending first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 in change is the first of the main RAM 63 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63 It is sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of pending second special symbol games is held, for example, up to four, the second corresponding to the second special symbol display unit 54 being changed 2 Special symbol game information is stored as starting storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for the number of pending four is the second of the main RAM 63 2 Special symbols start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

  Therefore, the maximum number of pending game balls pertaining to the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display portion 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending display by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the large winning opening 37 by the large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the large winning opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (one winning number in this embodiment) It is maintained until any one of the conditions is met, such as passing a defined later release time. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the big winning opening 37.

  In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed several times based on a big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. For the state from when the big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game until the big winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game, “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval” or It is also called simply "interval". In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in the other example, the big winning opening 37 is opened multiple times in one round. And may be closed. When a plurality of big winning openings are provided, it is also possible to exclusively control the open / close state of the plurality of big winning openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning openings are continuously closed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called small hit gaming state is provided as a gaming state having a property different from the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of this embodiment, the large winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. . Of course, in the small hit gaming state, control may be performed so that an arbitrary or specific large winning opening is repeatedly opened several times. The small hit gaming state is a gaming state in which the game is shifted in response to the winning of the small hit by the special symbol lottery. Before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state, basically the gaming state does not change. For example, when a small hit is won in the non probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is shifted to, the gaming status after the end of the small hitting gaming status remains the non probability variation gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming status It does not shift to the probability variation gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is entered, the gaming status after the termination of the small hitting gaming status is the small hitting gaming status as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability variation gaming state before transitioning to, and does not shift to the non probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of rounds) like one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with regard to the numbered “round” such as one round or the first round, for example, simply “R” as in 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. If the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times in one round game, the specified winning number per round is reached before the opening state is reached. The big winning opening is closed, and the round game is ended without the big winning opening being opened for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display region 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made of numerals except in a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In addition, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is a specific stop display mode, the player is made to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, a special symbol is displayed on one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that can be obtained by many balls. When the stop display is performed, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows The display image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4).

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 described above will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by supplying power to the main RAM 63 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a wing member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or a hall computer 100 managing a plurality of pachinko machines installed in the hall. Is for data communication.

  Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start opening switch 320, a second start opening switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a special winning opening count switch 370, a general winning opening left switch 400A, and a general winning opening A right switch 400B and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / firing control circuit 82 described later at the time of power interruption or the like according to the operation of the hole manager.

  Further, the main control circuit 60 is connected with the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / firing control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / emission control circuit 82. The dispensing and firing control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / firing control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving unit.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of gaming balls in accordance with the operation of a player, and can transmit and receive signals with the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per one general winning opening 40. 10 game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of winning balls per winning to the large winning opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the player handles the firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 and rotates the device in the clockwise direction. Power is supplied to the game area 1p, and control is made to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main processing and executes timer interrupt processing as interrupt processing even during execution of main processing described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured to be supplied with a command from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and the sub CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, command input port 74, backup capacitor 75, display control A circuit 76, an audio control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect apparatus control circuit 79 are included. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. The voice control circuit 77 is connected to the speakers 10 a, 10 b and 10 c. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor, a mechanism, and the like for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the push operation button switch 90A provided to the push operation button 9A and to the jog dial switch 90B provided to the jog dial 9B. The pressing operation button switch 90A is for detecting the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B is for identifying the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A, and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 described above will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for controlling the various effects mainly by the sub CPU 71 and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flag, counter, timer, value of variable, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60, and transmits the various commands to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by supplying power to the work RAM 73 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and, for example, an image data processor (VDP) and various image data are generated. It comprises an image data ROM in which data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores, in the frame buffer, image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative symbol image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 also supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The voice control circuit 77 is for performing control relating to voice and the like generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, for example, a sound source IC for performing control relating to voice and the like, voice data ROM for storing various voice data, voice signal Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC also reads out the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the amplifier. In addition, this amplifier amplifies an audio | voice signal and generates audio | voice from speaker 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a decoration data ROM etc. in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit game state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by the operation of the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9 Etc.) to control the rendering operation.

[Specs of gaming machines]
Next, specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability of the special symbol to be in the big hit gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability changing gaming state), high probability It is 1 / 113.05 (5020/65536) at the time (probable variation gaming state). The small hit probability of the special symbol to be a small hit gaming state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 10 times as the number of games (number of times of variation of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds easy to win for the big winning opening 7R) is awarded, and the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the big hit gaming state is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", with respect to the winnings in the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is 0. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 105. The probability (rush rate) to be "certainly 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, "bonus" means a notification effect related to the number of winning balls.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" is hit pattern 2 and is given the number of rounds 16R (effectively the number of rounds 16R), the bonus name is "large bonus bonus", the bonus content is "large bonus addition" It is a bonus. In the "large-accumulation bonus", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is four. As a result, in the "super-addition bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 645. The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 2" is hit pattern 3 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "middle-on bonus 1", the bonus content is "middle It is an extra bonus 1 ". In the "middle additional bonus 1", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is three. As a result, the "premium bonus 1" has 510 planned balls. The probability (rush rate) of becoming “probable variation 2” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

  The second special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 3", the hit pattern 4 will be given the number of rounds 16R (also the number of rounds 16R) is given as the bonus name "intermediate bonus 2", as the bonus content "inside It is an additional bonus 2 ". In the "middle additional bonus 2", the estimated number of winnings for 1st to 7th eyes is 1, the estimated number of winnings for 8th and 9th eyes is 2, and the estimated number of 10th and 11th eyes for winning in the special winning opening 37 The number of prizes is three, the number of estimated prizes for the 12th R is one, and the number of prizes for the thirteenth to sixteenth eyes is four. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 2", the number of planned prize balls is 510. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 3" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "4" is hit pattern 5 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus 1", the bonus content is "small It is an extra bonus 1 ". The "small advance bonus 1" has an estimated number of 1st to 7th winnings of 1 and an estimated number of 8th to 16th winnings of 2 for winning on the special winning opening 37. As a result, in the "small advance bonus 1", the number of planned prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 4" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "5" is the hit pattern 6 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus 2", the effect content is "small It is an additional bonus 2 ". The "small advance bonus 2" has an estimated number of 1st to 13th winnings of 1 for the winnings on the special winning opening 37 and an estimated number of winnings of 14th to 16th r is four. As a result, in the "small advance bonus 2", the number of planned prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 5" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "6" is hit pattern 7 and is given the number of rounds 16R (actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "no additional bonus", the content of bonus is "no additional It is a bonus. The "no additional bonus" has an estimated number of winnings of 1R to 16R for the winning on the special winning opening 37 as one. As a result, the planned prize ball number is 240 in the "no-addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 6" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit pattern 8 is made, and the bonus name and the bonus contents are "small hit". The rush rate of the small hit design is set to 100/100. In the small hit gaming state, unlike the big hit gaming state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The special winning opening count corresponds to the specified winning number which is one opportunity when the large winning opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state in one round, and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count (predetermined winning number) Is set to "1". That is, when one winning combination for the big winning opening 37 is counted in one round, the big winning opening 37 is closed from the open state. Note that the special winning opening count number (prescribed number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, a prize that exceeds the special winning opening count number is detected in one round, the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is paid out. As a result, an over winning that exceeds the special winning opening count is possible. This point will be described later.

  As the time saving performance (specification of the time saving gaming state), the time saving gaming state is set to be continued during the high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state). The number of winning balls is three per winning combination for the starting opening (the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33), and is ten per winning combination for the general winning opening 40, to the special winning opening 37. It is set to be 15 pieces per prize. The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to 0/257 at low probability and 257/257 at high probability. The number of symbols per hit is set to one. The winning count number when the second starting opening 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as the upper limit.

  The specification may be as follows. For example, with regard to the special symbol, the big hit probability at the low probability time and the high probability is not limited to the one described above. That is, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win a big hit at high probability than at low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the probability of winning in the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. With regard to the order of digesting the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be in the winning order without setting the priority, or the first special symbol may be prioritized. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Also, the probability change gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. In addition, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the extra bonus. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “1”, but is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a special winning opening shutter or the like that allows the game balls larger than the special winning opening count number to pass simultaneously. The time saving performance may be more than the ST number (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST number including, for example, 0 times. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls relating to the special winning opening is set to a value different from that described above, the planned number of winning balls is calculated using that value and the estimated number of winnings, and notification of the additional number described later is performed. You can do so. With regard to the ordinary symbol, the low probability time and the high probability time hitting probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the hit probability of the normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, for example, it may be winning at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the open patterns of the blade members be associated differently. The winning count number of the second starting opening may have a value other than that described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the open / close pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening and closing patterns A to C are defined as the opening and closing pattern (one round opening and closing pattern) of one round for the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing patterns A to C are opening and closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening and closing pattern C among them is an opening and closing pattern also corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing pattern C in the small hitting gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The opening and closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types and the specific time for defining the opening and closing patterns may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 s. The open / close pattern A is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. Similarly, in the other opening and closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening to the final closing. In a section where the open state is 10s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is relatively long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern A, the long opening is generated once, and the opening time of the opening and closing pattern A is 10 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 s. The opening and closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. In the section where the open state is 5s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is middle open shorter than the long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern B, the middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening and closing pattern B is 5 seconds.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern that only causes the open state to be 0.1 s. In the section where the open state is 0.1 s, the short open is considerably shorter than the middle open. That is, the open / close pattern C is such that short circuit opening occurs only once, and the open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.1 s.

  The substantial round game in the jackpot gaming state is a round game when opening and closing is controlled based on opening and closing patterns A and B including long opening or middle opening where winning of a game ball is possible among the opening and closing patterns A to C described above. Applicable The round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing pattern C is a non-substantially round game that does not correspond to a substantially round game.

  In addition, as an opening and closing pattern of one round, the following contents may be sufficient. The open pattern is not limited to the above three types, and may be two or less or four or more. The opening and closing pattern A may not be 10 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 10 seconds or more than 10 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round. As for the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time may not be 5 seconds, but may be less than 5 seconds or more than 5 seconds, for example, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round. Furthermore, the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B may be the same opening time, or the opening and closing pattern B may be longer than the opening and closing pattern A. For the opening and closing pattern C, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, for example, may be less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, the big hit opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The hit pattern 1 occurs during the normal bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the open rounds (hereinafter referred to as the “prescribed round number”) and the long open or middle where winning in the big winning opening 37 is possible The actual number of rounds defined only for the rounds including at least opening is the hit pattern defined as 7R. In addition, the interval between rounds starts immediately after the game ball of the specified winning number (1) is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 in one round, and the big winning until it is first opened in the next round It corresponds to the section where the mouth 37 is in the closed state. The inter-round interval may be started immediately after the big winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, as a pattern of the inter-round interval, an interval pattern a in which the time (closing time) to be in the closed state is 0.3 s, an interval pattern b to be 1.65 s, and an interval pattern in 2.3 1 s c, an interval pattern d of 2.97 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 has an interval pattern a between all round intervals, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the large winning opening 37 in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. The opening and closing pattern C is defined. That is, the hit pattern 1 specifies that the substantial round is the 7th round of the 1Rth to 7Rth, and the remaining 9th round of the 8Rth to 16Rth is executed as the non-substantially round.

  The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 7Rs is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16Rs is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. In the large extra bonus that is executed as an effect with hit pattern 2, the number of winning balls based on only the large winning opening count number (prescribed number of winnings: 1) will be 240, and including the over winning will be the planned winning ball number. Since it becomes 645, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is notified as an additional number in the first half round (the 1st to 7th rounds).

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 1, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 7R to the start of 16R is the interval pattern c, and 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. The middle bonus bonus 1, which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, is 240 in the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes, and the planned number of prize balls will be 510 if over winning is included. The number (270) to be played is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 2, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between round from the end of 7R to the start of 9R is the interval pattern b, from the end of 9R to the start of 11R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between 11R and 12R is interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 12R to the start of 16R is interval pattern d, and 1R to 16R The big winning opening 37 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern B in all the rounds of. In the middle additional bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of balls (510) is the second half round (round 8R and subsequent rounds) It is informed as an additional number.

  The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern which is generated when the small bonus is added 1 and the number of defined rounds and the number of substantially rounds are defined as 16R. In hit pattern 5, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 7R to the start of 16R is the interval pattern b, and 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. The small bonus bonus 1, which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, is 240 in the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes, and the planned number of balls will be 375 if over winning is included. The number to be performed (135) is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The hit pattern 6 is a hit pattern which is generated when the small bonus is added 2 and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 13Rs is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 13Rs to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. In small additional bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with hit pattern 6, a number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the scheduled number of balls (375) is notified as an additional number until the second half round .

  The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern which is generated when the bonus is not added and the number of defined rounds and the number of substantially rounds are defined as 16R. Hit pattern 7 specifies that all inter-round intervals from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 16th R are the interval pattern a, and the big winning opening 37 has the open / close pattern B in all the 1st to 16th R rounds. It is done. In the no-addition bonus executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (240) since it is difficult for over winning to occur, and notification of the number of additions is performed. Absent.

  The hit pattern 8 is generated in the small hit gaming state, and the large winning opening 37 is defined to be the open / close pattern C only once. That is, the hit pattern 8 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning the gaming ball with respect to the large winning opening 37 is extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as described later, the interval time between rounds is defined as the above-mentioned interval patterns a to d on the assumption that the gaming balls are continuously fired, but the gaming balls are as described above. The interval time between rounds may be defined on the basis of the launch operation start point of. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of gaming balls are fired successively by the launch operation start, for example, the second game sphere can reach the big winning opening shutter 37A from the launch operation start time. The expected maximum arrival time for the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the third estimated maximum arrival time is 4.65 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), the fourth estimated maximum arrival time is 5.31 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), 5 The second estimated maximum reach time is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). Thus, as the interval pattern b, a time corresponding to such a second estimated maximum arrival time may be defined. That is, although the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-mentioned time, it is preferable that the interval pattern a is a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum The time is preferably less than the arrival time, the interval pattern c is preferably less than the fourth expected maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth expected maximum arrival time. It is preferable that In the present embodiment, the interval pattern d which is the maximum time of the inter-round interval is defined as a time in which four winnings per round (three over winnings) can be realized, but five or more per round are specified. It may be a time when winning is possible. However, when enabling five or more winnings, it is preferable to set the size in the longitudinal direction of the large winning opening shutter 37A to a length that allows at least five gaming balls to pass simultaneously. Also, the hit pattern 1 may be one in which the same open / close pattern is assigned to all the rounds, or alternatively, the open / close pattern may be different only in some of the rounds. Furthermore, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only for a part of the intervals between rounds. In the hit patterns 2 to 7, the opening and closing patterns may be different in some or all of the rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only at some intervals between rounds.

[Specifications of the big winning opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 or the like for the sake of convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the drawing). For example, when the diameter d of the gaming ball is 11 mm, the large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, up to eight gaming balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, a firing interval until one game ball is fired after one game ball is fired according to the firing operation start, or one game ball is fired As shown in FIG. 10B by considering the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A (the upper area of the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state). On the assumption, up to four game balls can pass simultaneously. The time until the gaming ball that has reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 (the time until the interval between rounds starts) is about 0.1 s. In addition, the time required to move from one of the positions to the other position of the positions where the special winning opening shutter 37A places the large winning opening 37 in the closed state and the opening position is about 0.01 s. It is.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the launcher 26 has a number of shots per minute of 90.90 / min and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. In addition, the gaming ball takes approximately 3.00 to 3 as a time from the shooting preparation position (not shown) to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30 '. It takes 33 seconds. Thereby, in the state where the right hitting is continued, the next game ball is a big winning after approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds after one game ball reaches the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A. The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. The large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight gaming balls having a diameter d of 11 mm can pass simultaneously in a row, but the upper surface has 0. Since it is an inclined surface advancing by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advancing by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, substantially up to 4 gaming balls can be passed simultaneously. Then, the interval between rounds is started from the time when the winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and it is started immediately before the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37. In addition, immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened, and the time from when the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 It takes 0.1 second. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening and closing operation in which the special winning opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, by assuming various times as described above, in the state in which the right hitting is continuously performed in the big hit gaming state, the time interval between rounds after the end of the first R is an interval In the case of 2.97 s of the pattern d, four wins are possible including three over wins per round. For a time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the gaming ball whose winning detection is performed at the 1st R reaches the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball becomes the big winning opening after 0.99 seconds at the maximum. From the time when the right end portion of the shutter 37A is reached, the time when four game balls including this game ball will be located on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99s + 0.66s × 3 ( This is demonstrated from the fact that it becomes = 2.97s. In addition, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st R is 2.31 s of the interval pattern c, 3 wins including 2 over wins per round become possible. This can be assumed as a reduction from three over wins to two over wins. Thereby, with respect to the time of the interval pattern c, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-described three over wins with respect to the time when three gaming balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It is considered that one passage time is deducted from this, and it is proved from 2.97 s−0.66 s = 2.31 s. Similarly, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first R is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two winnings including one over winning per round are possible. This can be assumed as a reduction from two over wins to one over win. Thereby, for the time of the interval pattern b, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the two over winnings described above for the time when two gaming balls will be located on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It can be considered that the transit time of one sample is deducted from this, and it is proved from 2.31 s−0.66 s = 1.65 s. Furthermore, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first R is 0.3s of the interval pattern a, there is no over winning in one round, and only one winning is possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the gaming ball whose winning detection is performed at the 1st R reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball becomes the big winning opening after 0.33 seconds at the shortest. To reach the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is demonstrated that the next game ball is in an open state before reaching the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A in 0.3 s shorter than such 0.33 seconds. Ru.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, although lottery value (random number value) information for determining predetermined matters based on lottery values (random number values) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range is defined in the table, these lottery Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, "random number value" may be simply referred to as "random number". 11 and 13 show the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate.

[Add pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an addition pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 7, and defines various kinds of additional patterns to be determined and selection rates (%) when selecting the additional patterns by lottery.

  According to the added pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with hit pattern 2, large added patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as added patterns corresponding to the large added bonus. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the intermediate add patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the inner additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle additional bonus 2 at a predetermined selectivity. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as an additional pattern corresponding to the small additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 2 with a predetermined selectivity. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with hit pattern 7, the non-added pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selectivity (100% in the present embodiment) as the added pattern corresponding to the bonus without addition. Be done.

  Note that the selection rate for distributing the additional patterns to be determined in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. The additional pattern selection table other than the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) defines four additional patterns respectively, but may define three or less or five or more additional patterns, and each additional pattern selection table The number of patterns defined for each may be different. A plurality of additional patterns may also be defined in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7).

[Overlay pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table to be referred to in the in-round effect processing (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for effect and the round for notifying the addition according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds serving as reference items, and the number of additional servings to be determined. In addition, the number of additions is notified with the appearance of the addition characters described later.

  According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large overlay pattern 1, “30” is notified as the number of additions in the 2nd R, “105” is notified as the number of additions in the 4th R, and “270” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "405".

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 1) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 1, "30" is notified as the number of additions in the second R, "105" is notified as the number of additions in the fourth R, and "135" is notified as the number of additions in the seventh R. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 2) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 5 to 8 as an additional addition pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 5, "135" is notified as the number of additions in the eighth R, and "135" is notified as the number of additions in the 9th R. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 1) corresponding to the small additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each small additional pattern 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 1, “30” is notified as the number of additions in the second R, and “105” is notified as the number of additions in the fourth R. The total number of additions of these is “135”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 2) corresponding to the small additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each small additional pattern 5 to 8 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 5, “135” is notified as the number of additions only at the 8th R.

  The number-of-rounds according to the no-addition pattern 1 as the addition pattern and the number of notified additions are defined according to the addition pattern table (no-addition bonus) corresponding to the no-addition bonus. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

  In addition, the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, and the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the planned number of balls may be suitably distributed You should do it. In addition, after notifying the numerical value exceeding the above-mentioned total addition number as the addition number, by setting the numerical value notified to be subtracted, it may be made to finally become a predetermined total addition number. . In addition, for example, “210” may be defined as the initial value, and notification of the number of additions may be generated in any round.

[Superimposed character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting the additional characters to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the notification of the additional number according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns serving as reference items, additional characters serving as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an additional character by lottery. As the additional characters, "animal", "female", and "pyrotechnician" are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, in general, the selectivity of the "female" added character is higher than that of the "animal" added character, and the selection of the "Fireworks teacher" added character is higher than that of the "female" added character. Is defined to be high. In the middle additional patterns 1 to 8, it is generally defined that the selection rate of the “female” and “pyrophorician” added characters is higher than that of the “animal” added characters. The small addition patterns 1 to 8 are generally defined such that the selection rate of the “animal” added character is higher than that of the “female” and “pyrocratic” added characters. In the non-superimposed pattern 1, it is defined that the selectivity of the “animal” superimposed character is the highest. According to the added character appearing based on such added character lottery table, the kind of bonus will be suggested, and the degree of expectation to the winning ball is also raised from the added number notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  The selection rate for distributing the additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, an additional pattern that can not be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the "animal" superimposed character can not be selected only in the large superimposing pattern, the "female" superimposing character can not be selected only in the non-superimposing pattern, and the "pyrophorist" superimposing character The selectivity may be defined such that it can be selected only in the middle-superimposed pattern or the large-superposed pattern.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs disable setting processing of the watchdog timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  At S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  At S12, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the processing is performed at S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub control reception acceptance wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  At S14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  At S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it transfers the process to S30 (see FIG. 15), and when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process proceeds to S16. Transfer the process.

  At S16, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the power failure detection flag is present, the process proceeds to S17, and when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is not present, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 15). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs damage check of the work area and performs processing of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, it transfers the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, it transfers the process to S30. .

  At S19, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set 7FFEH to the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  At S21, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting and displaying a probability change state display notification at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display to be displayed to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is the high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power-on or at the end of fluctuation.

  At S22, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24, and returns to the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  At S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, the main CPU 61 performs an initialization process of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 61 performs processing to transmit a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 executes initialization based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  At S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt disable processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of inhibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  At S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  At S39, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt permission processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs processing for updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  At S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 If not, the process moves to S37.

  In S42, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  At S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and measures the opening time of the big winning opening 37 opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. A special winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent act Execute processing to update various timers. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  At S44, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Main CPU 61 extracts a random number for collision determination and a random number for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from first start winning opening switch 320 and second starting winning opening switch 330, and is stored in main ROM 62. Whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) is won is determined with reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), and processing of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 63 is performed. In addition, about the special symbol control processing of S44, it mentions later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  At S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, main CPU 61 extracts the random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for ordinary symbol determination in accordance with the detection signal from pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted random number for ordinary symbol determination and main ROM 62 Whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won is determined based on the selected normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the hit symbol is to be used, and processing of storing the result of the determination is performed. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and when the non-winning is selected, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, three times in 1.3 seconds, or opens four times in 1.4 seconds, or opens six times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing members 34 are opened, and when the wing members 34 are in the open state, the game ball easily wins the second starting opening 33. When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  At S46, the main CPU 61 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. Perform processing to memorize. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 changes and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  At S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or the hall computer 100, and stores the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  At S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol holding number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S71 and S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later (S71, S72 in FIG. 17). First based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  At S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting control signals stored in the main RAM 63 in the above-described steps from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and outputs an LED power (common signal) for lighting the LED, opening and closing of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the blade member 34. Supply solenoid power for solenoid drive to open and close. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  At S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning opening related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the game processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main processing, the main processing may be interrupted to execute timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes an interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  At S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing predetermined processing (special symbol control processing, etc.) on condition that activation of timer interruption processing is performed a predetermined number of times (three times). When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  At S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data, and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  At S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates a random number such as a random number counter for hit determination, a random number counter for hit symbol determination, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, and a random number counter for presentation condition determination. In addition, since the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for hit symbol determination loses fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indeterminate, the timing determined every 2 ms in order to secure this. To make updates on When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  At S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passage area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have a winning to “1 (ON)”. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  At S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not the game ball has won in the special winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40, and if there is a winning, Is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out from the payout device 83 a prize ball corresponding to the passage area in which the bit is "1 (ON)" along with the winning of the game ball, and the set command Is sent to the payout / emission control circuit 82. Also, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area triggered by the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  At S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  At S67, the main CPU 61 performs register recovery processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, etc. If this process ends, the process moves to S71. In addition, when it is in the state which one of the above-mentioned sensors detected, error notification may be performed, and even if, for example, the big winning opening count switch detects the winning of the gaming ball, the winning is invalidated. You may do it.

  At S71, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol related switch check processing. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  At S72, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passage gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and when it is determined that there is an input, the number of reservations is an upper limit (for example, If it is determined that the upper limit is set, the process ends. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and a random value for hit symbol determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. Perform processing to store in the symbol storage area. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  At S73, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. If it is determined that there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or second When it is determined that there is an input of the start winning opening switch 330, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each. When this process ends, the switch input processing routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  At S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

[First start port switch check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 32 has been detected based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S91, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  At S91, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

  At S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of holdings of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 32 during fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  At S94, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set first special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  At S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a hit determination random number and information indicating a hit symbol determination random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has been won or the result of the hit lottery result. It will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball on which the effect is displayed, when it is determined that the winning effect is performed in the process of S95. This enables so-called "pre-reading effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the change execution. When this process ends, the first start port switch check process routine ends.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S100, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 33 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S101, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the number of start memories of the second special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of starting and storing of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of pending of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  At S104, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting second special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting second special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S106.

  In S106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second start port switch check process routine ends.

[Big winning opening switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37 has been detected based on the detection signal from the special winning opening count switch 370. . In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 has been detected, it shifts the process to S 111 and determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding one to the value of the special winning opening winning counter. The special winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a prescribed number of winnings. When this process ends, the process moves to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 sets a special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 so that the auxiliary control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37. Become. Under the condition that such a special winning opening winning command is received, the sub control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of additions displayed during the additional bonus to a scheduled prize ball number described later. When this process ends, the special winning opening switch check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. In FIG. 22, numerical values shown on the side of S121 to S128 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value according to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game is advanced.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads a control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In addition, in S121 to S128 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S121 to S128 to be performed. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. Note that before the predetermined timing is reached, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  At S121, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage check processing. The details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  At S122, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. Set and set waiting time (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed, the process of S123 is set to be executed. The details of this S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  At S123, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol display time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and if the wait time after confirmation has passed, whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the process of S124 is set to be performed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S128. The details of this S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 executes hit start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the control status flag indicating the hit start interval management value (03H), and the special winning opening shutter read from the main ROM 62 when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. Data for releasing 37 A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out the data for opening the big winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and sends a signal indicating that the big winning opening shutter 37A is opened. The special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A is supplied. Thereby, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 37. In other words, the game state is executed by repeatedly performing a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the big winning opening 37 changes to an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball and an unacceptably closed state after an interval period) Become. In this case, a small hit gaming state may be executed in which the big winning opening 37 is open only once.

  Furthermore, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time limit (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) to the special winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S126. The details of this S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  At S125, the main CPU 61 executes waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed, The special winning opening open frequency counter is updated and stored so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 10 seconds of the open / close pattern A per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S126. The details of this S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening open process. In this process, when the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has passed the open upper limit time under the condition that the big winning opening winning counter is "1" or more ((04H) It is determined whether any of the conditions of the special winning opening open time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 in order to close the large winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is equal to or greater than the maximum value (which is the final round). The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the final round, while the value (05H) indicates the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening while it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. The details of this S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  At S127, the main CPU 61 executes hit end interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to the flag. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S128. The details of this S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S128.

  At S128, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check, when the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. The details of this S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol control processing routine is ended.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control status flags (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is loss. By sequentially setting () and (07H), the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is performed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control state flag (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. By setting in order and, processing of S121, S122 and S123 which are shown in Figure 22 is executed with specified timing, control to big hit game state or small hit game state will be executed. Furthermore, when control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (03H), (04H), (05H) in order, as shown in FIG. The processing of S124, S126, and S125 shown is executed at a predetermined timing to execute the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ending condition is established, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S133.

  At S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demonstration display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state where the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area where the random value for hitting determination is stored) becomes "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30s) If maintained, set a value to allow execution of the demo display as a demo display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demonstration display command. Thus, the demonstration display is performed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is ended, the special symbol memory check processing routine is ended.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data of second special symbol start storage area (0) to second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the processing is shifted to S134. If the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S135 Transfer the process to

  In S134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuated as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  At S137, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 executes the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. Execute processing to shift (store) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area Execute processing to shift (store) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) Do. When this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  At S138, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one big hit from a plurality of big hit determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of big hit determination values (big hit determination values) depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probable variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and the gaming status flag is not a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with less is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probable variation gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probable variation gaming state as a special gaming state which is easily shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), The probability of transition is improved as compared to the non-probable variation gaming state as a non-special gaming state which is less likely to shift to the specific gaming state than the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state.

  In addition, the special game state is a definite change / time short game state, and the non special game state is basically a non-probability change / non-short time game state, but the special game state is at least one of a probability change gaming state and a time reduction game state It may be one game state. The non-special gaming state may include the non-probability changing gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning of the game ball, and it is for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected big hit judgment table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the process of S138, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination processing of S138, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a small hit determination value (small hit determination value) regardless of the game state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning a game ball, and is a random number value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0) And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit if the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match.

  In addition, since small hits can occur in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the collision judgment disturbances stored in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) or the second special symbol starting memory area Although the small hit determination processing is performed based on the numerical value, the small hit determination processing may be performed based only on the hit determination random number value stored in any one of the special symbol start storage areas.

  As described above, in the process of S139, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is not selected when both of the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 are not won. A loss will be determined as the determination result of the game. When this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  At S140, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol if the result of the big hit determination is the big hit, and determines the small hit symbol if the result of the small hit determination is the small hit, for either the big hit or the small hit In the case of loss too, processing to determine the lost design is performed. The details of this S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S141.

  At S141, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. The variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, in the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state, different variation pattern determination tables are provided. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this process is the same during the ST gaming state.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  At S142, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  Then, in S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display of this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S156.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that it is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol In the case, the process moves to S154.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the first special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to the definite variation 1. When this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  At S154, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine a jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the second special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine which of the definite variations 1 to 6 corresponds to the symbol). If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 if it is a small hit. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 if it is not a small hit.

  At S157, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hitting symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the random number for determining the winning symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the small hitting determination table (see FIG.・ We perform processing to determine whether it is the symbol of the small hit shown in the second special symbol small hit design distribution. If this process ends, the process moves to S158.

  In S158, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the small hit symbols of the determined first special symbol or the second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol and displays the special symbol in a stop manner based on the data of the big hit symbol. Further, main CPU 61 sets a small hit symbol command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from main CPU 61 to sub CPU 71 of sub control circuit 70. . By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 61 performs hit start interval display time data set processing corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S160.

  In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening open frequency related data setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the number of times of opening of the special winning opening 37 related data related to the number of opening of the special winning opening 37, ie, the definite variation 1 due to the first special symbol or the definite variation 1 due to the second special symbol 1 or 6 The corresponding data is set in the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines in S150 that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit in S156 in S150, that is, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designating command. Under the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the stop-of-loss display mode. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol variation time management (a value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the processing is shifted to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the processing to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes symbol stop in the symbol display device control processing, and derives the display result by the symbol determined in the special symbol determination processing.

  At S173, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S174, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as a wait time after confirmation, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as a wait time after confirmation . In either case of the hit symbol and the lost symbol, the same post-confirmation waiting time may be used, or the lost symbol may be longer than the hit symbol in the waiting time. When this process is ended, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol display time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the special symbol display time management process routine is ended.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S183. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S184.

  In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  At S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation gaming state. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the probability variation number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S186.

  In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S187 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189.

  At S187, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a definite variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) in the main RAM 63 a definite variation end command indicating the end of the probable variation gaming state. Then, the definite variation end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the subsidiary CPU 71 of the subsidiary control circuit 70, so that the subsidiary control circuit 70 recognizes the termination of the probable variation gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S190. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S194.

  In S190, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is a big hit symbol of “probability 1” to “probability 6” is the right end of the big winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. For example, 2500 ms is shorter than 3000 ms which is the shortest time to reach a part.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or starts the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit playing state, and data indicating a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an additional pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state by the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (07H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, it ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit start interval management processing routine is ended.

  In S202, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S205.

  In S203, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) the special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the processing to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding “1” to the special winning opening open frequency counter, and shifts the processing to S205.

  In S205, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern according to the type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the hit pattern (big winning opening opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big hit symbol or small hit symbol determined in S205. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S206, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S207, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S208, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S209.

  In S209, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 10 s, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probable variation 1”, for a time according to the value (round number) of the special winning opening open frequency counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S210.

  In S210, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variable stored as described above drives the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the large winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to one of the opening and closing patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening before reopening waiting time management process, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main winning opening pre-opening question management process routine ends.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S222. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  At S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S223.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S227.

  In S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the waiting time question management process routine before the big winning opening reopening is ended. Also in this process, data corresponding to any one of the opening and closing patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening open processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating a process for opening a special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the processing is shifted to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main winning opening opening processing routine is ended.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "1" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “1” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the process to S233. In S232, a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening open processing routine.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is for closing the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  At S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number), and the value of the special winning opening frequency counter It is determined whether or not the upper limit value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening is equal to or more. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 16 (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not less than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. The inter-round interval display time is set to a time corresponding to the interval patterns a to d. If this process ends, the process moves to S238.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before a special winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S239.

  In S239, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (06H) indicating the end-of-hit interval management processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process proceeds to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, it ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  At S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S252. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit end interval management processing routine is ended.

  At S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the type of hit gaming state ended is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S254. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S256.

  At S254, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set "01H" to the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Note that "00H" of the gaming state flag indicates the non-probability changing gaming state and the non-time-short playing state. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  At S255, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “10” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the hit end interval management process routine is ended.

  In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type (big hit, small hit) of the finished gaming state in addition to information indicating the gaming state to be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Such a game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end processing routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for initialization in response to power on. When this process ends, the process moves to S271.

  In S271, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S272.

  In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for performing display in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor), based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71, various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S274.

  In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs sound control processing for controlling the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling the light emission (lighting / flickering) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S 276, the sub CPU 71 performs movable effect device control processing via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process of controlling the movable effect device 42 which drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process ends, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even when the sub CPU 71 is executing the main processing, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the command reception interrupt processing or the timer interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 33, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a program under execution stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed in the command analysis process of FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S291.

  In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S292.

  In S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. Although this processing is actually determination processing, it is described as one routine here because it is interrupt processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

Command analysis processing
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S303. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. If the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to S306.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the stop decoration symbol is determined. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, the numbers "1" to "7", and a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits) of these decorative symbols (numbers) are displayed. When)) is aligned with the same decorative symbol (number), it basically shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is "probability variation 1", with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability of 1/10 of them when the second special symbol is "probability variation 1"), The decorative symbol is a match of numbers "3" or "7". In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" of the first special symbol is a match of the numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6", and the big hit symbol "2nd special symbol" The decorative symbol corresponding to the definite variation 1 "to the definite variation 6 is a match of the numerals" 1 "," 2 ", and" 4 "to" 6 ". Further, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol is, for example, a specific appearance with the numeral "135" as a combination of the specific symbols, and the decorative design corresponding to the lost is a loose eye other than the specific appearance. In addition, about correspondence between the big hit symbol and the decorative symbol, as a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability change 1” is set as the alignment of “3” or “7”, and the big hit symbol “probable variable The decorative symbols corresponding to 2 "to" provisional variation 6 "may be set to be a match of" 1 "," 2 ", and" 4 "to" 6 ". Also, for example, in the case of the "large additional bonus", the decorative symbol is made to be a match of "3" or "7", and in the case of the "middle additional bonus", the decorative symbol is "1" or "5". In the case of "small addition bonus" and "no additional bonus", the decoration pattern is set to "2", "4" or "6", and the stop pattern of the decoration pattern for each type of jackpot May be uniquely determined.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to S308.

  In S307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S309. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in S301. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during a round. The in-round presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a hit end display command has been received as the command read out in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit / end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as the effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of “01H” to “08H” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. As for the hit effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, and each of “02H” to “07H” is a large addition bonus, a middle addition bonus 1 and 2, a small addition bonus 1 and 2, a no addition bonus Correspondingly, "08H" corresponds to a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start of the additional bonus or the non-additional bonus is based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "07H", the processing is shifted to S328.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to select the additional pattern selection table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern selection table and performs processing for selecting any of the additional patterns. At this time, for example, one of the additional patterns can be selected using the effect determination random number value. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 patterns are provided as superimposition patterns, and superimposition patterns are provided for large superimposition patterns 1 to 4, middle superimposable patterns 1 to 8, small superimposable patterns 1 to 8, and no superimposition pattern 1. The flags “01H” to “15H” correspond to each other. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs processing of selecting an additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, one of the additional characters can be selected using the effect determination random number value. As the additional characters, “Animal”, “Female”, and “Fireworks” additional characters are selected. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data up to the start of the round game including the display of the added character determined based on the added character selection table and the display of the added number as an initial value. When this process ends, the process moves to S327.

  In S327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "240" in the winning number counter. The value "240" corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out at least in the 16R round game, and is displayed as an initial value of the planned number of prize balls in the hit start interval. In the case where the notification of the additional number is not performed at all, that is, in the case of the no additional bonus, the initial value "240" is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data up to the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[In-round production process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing in-round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round presentation process is a process for determining whether to notify the number of additions in each round, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding one to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by one each time one round game is executed (every time the big winning opening open indication command is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (the number of executed round games Is a counter for indicating the number of times) and is basically the same value as the large winning opening opening number of times counter used in the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not an additional bonus (including a bonus with no additional bonus) is being executed, based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag corresponds to any one of "02H" to "07H" and the additional bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “02H” to “07H” and the additional bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to select the additional pattern table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern table, and reports the additional number based on the value of the additional pattern flag (the additional pattern) and the value indicated by the round number counter (the number of rounds). Processing to determine whether or not If it is determined that the round is to notify the number of additions, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is not to notify the number of additions, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for notifying the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, in the display area 4A in the corresponding round, the number of additions is displayed together with the selected addition character. If this process ends, the process moves to S335.

  In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additions to the winning ball number counter. As a result, in the winning number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value "240", and the counter value increases to the scheduled winning number for each addition. For example, in the case of super-superimposed pattern 4, “135” of the superimposing number is added in the 1st, 4th, and 7th eyes, and “645” of the scheduled prize ball number finally combined with the initial value of “240” is displayed It will be done. In addition, although the scheduled prize ball number is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the scheduled prize ball number is not necessarily displayed immediately after the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the effect according to the addition is executed It will be displayed after addition. If this process ends, the process moves to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of the superimposition bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including the background image and the like in the 1st to 7th eyes and the 8th to 16th eyes. In the case of a normal bonus and a small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process ends, the in-round effect processing routine ends.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit / termination effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit / finish interval which is the end time of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the bonus bonus or the bonus without bonus is made based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S342.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 sets “0” to the value of the winning ball number counter and performs processing of resetting the counter value. In addition, although the scheduled prize ball number is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the scheduled prize ball number is not necessarily displayed as 0 immediately after the reset of the prize ball number counter, and effects are produced after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition to this, the display of the scheduled award ball number can be switched. In addition, when the value of the award ball number counter is reset, the planned award ball number may not be displayed as “0”, and the display itself of the planned award ball number may be hidden. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the hit gaming state. At this time, as the end effect data, data of effect contents different depending on any of the normal bonus, the bonus for addition (including the bonus without addition), and the small hit is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" in the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over winning occurs in the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  39 and 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when the over winning occurs. 39 and 40 schematically show the behavior from the start of the hit start interval to the inter-round interval after the end of the 2R's after the start of the hit start interval in the large-scale bonus, but for convenience, the 1R's and 2R's An interval pattern d is applied as an inter-round interval between the eyes, unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above. In addition, the gaming ball is continuously fired immediately after the start of the hit start interval, and after 3.1s uniformly, the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37 in the open state) Shall be reached. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... in order of firing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until 2.5 seconds, which is the hit start interval time, for example, has elapsed. In other words, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A after firing the game ball, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the game ball launch operation by right-handling is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A that closes the big winning opening 37.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, when the hit start interval time has elapsed, the first R starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37A opens the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. I assume. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39C, the gaming ball (0) fired immediately after the start of the hit start interval is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). It rolls around to the right end.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and the high winning opening count switch 370 detects a winning. . That is, by detecting a prize reaching the prescribed number of prizes “1”, the first R end is ended, and the inter-round interval before the start of the second R is started. At this time, the time from when the hit start interval starts to when the winning of the game ball (0) fired immediately after that is detected is approximately 3.2 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), with the start of the interval between rounds, the big winning opening shutter 37A starts the movement projecting in the direction of the white arrow to make the big winning opening 37 closed again. Do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Further, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the 2R's start, the gaming ball (1) becomes a big winning The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the firing and approximately 0.56 s from the start of the interval between rounds (the point in time of FIG. 39 (D)) It will be after the passage.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to 40 (I), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until the time defined as the inter-round interval, for example, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, has elapsed. It will be in the state. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (1) to (4) pass from the right to the left in a line. At this time, the gaming balls (1) to (4) reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A sequentially every approximately 0.66 seconds, and further roll at a speed advancing approximately 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. Note that, when counting from the start time point of the inter-round interval (time point of FIG. 39 (D)), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (G) is approximately 1.22 s later and reaches the state of FIG. 40 (H) The time is after about 1.88 seconds, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40I is after about 2.54 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the inter-round interval ends and the second R starts, and the big winning opening shutter 37A has an operation time of about 0.01 s. Then, the special winning opening 37 is opened again by retreating in the direction of the white arrow. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass simultaneously through the large winning opening 37 in the open state and fall downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 achieves four winnings. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the second round in which the inter-round interval ends, three to four over winnings in addition to one winning of the prescribed winning number are detected. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over wins are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over wins are detected, and the interval pattern a 0 If it is .3s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the specified winning number is detected but no over winning is detected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), 2R is achieved by detecting the winning of the gaming ball (the gaming ball (4) outside the figure in FIG. 40) which first reaches the position of the big winning opening count switch 370. The eye ends and the inter-round interval before the 3Rs start is started. At this time, the next game ball (5) is located in the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 again in the interval between rounds before the 3R's start, the gaming ball (5) becomes a big winning The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over winnings are realized in predetermined rounds after the 2R's.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for describing various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and illustrates operation timings in the large additional bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. Also in FIG. 41, for the sake of convenience, an interval pattern d is applied as an interval between 1R and 2R or as an inter-round interval after the end of 2R, unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above. The "firing state" indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as "non-firing", and indicates a state in which a firing operation is performed as "firing". The “playing state” indicates a round game and an interval in the jackpot playing state. The "required time" indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. The “big winning opening” indicates the closed or open state of the big winning opening 37. “The number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of gaming balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. “Elapsed time after change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of gaming balls on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A has changed. “The illustrated state” indicates the symbol at the end of FIG. 39 (A) to FIG. 40 (L). In addition, (E) and (K) shown as illustrated states additionally indicate “*” because the big winning opening 37 is not completely closed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, assuming that the big hit is decided and the firing operation is started about 0.1 seconds after the big hit is started, the time until the gaming ball is actually fired is approximately 0.66 s It takes approximately 3.1 seconds for the game ball thus fired to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A. On the other hand, when 2.5 s has passed as the hit start interval after the big hit is determined, the big winning opening 37 is in the open state. Thereby, the game ball which has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 s. That is, after the big hit is determined, the firing operation is started, and the time until the first game ball fired is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = It will be 3.96s. The time 1.46 s obtained by subtracting the time 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the release time 1 R.

  Thereafter, the interval between rounds after the end of the first R starts, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is in a closed state over 2.97 s of the interval pattern d. Then, in the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the gaming ball located on the upper surface thereof increases by approximately one every 0.66 s, and the big winning opening 37 is again in the opening state by the start of the second R Four game balls are supported by the big winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the second R is started and the large winning opening 37 is in the open state, winning of four game balls is detected. Among them, when the winning of one game ball is first detected after about 0.1 s, the big winning opening 37 is closed, and the interval between rounds after the end of the 2R is started, and 4 in the 3R not shown is also shown. Winnings of individual game balls will be detected. As described above, if the interval time between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over wins can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31 s, 1 + 2 over wins can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65 s, 1 + 1 over wins can be realized.

[Example of screen display of bonus bonus]
42 to 44 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the bonus on bonus. FIG. 42 is a screen display example of an additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1, FIG. 43 is a screen display example of an additional bonus corresponding to the small additional pattern 5, and FIG. It is an example of a screen display of an additional bonus.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the large additional bonus according to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large added pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A of, for example, a "pyrotechnician" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled award ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1R is started, a display field 704 showing the type of the additional character and the scheduled number of balls per addition of the additional number are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A display field 705 for adding and displaying, and a display field 706 for displaying the period of the second half round as a "winning sphere increase zone" to be described later with the period of the first half round as the "addition specialization zone" are displayed. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the sixteenth round is completed. For example, in the display field 704, the "Fireworksman" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the sixteenth round is over. On the other hand, after the superimposition number is displayed in the center of the screen in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball count to which the superimposition number is added is additionally displayed. In the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of additions is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12), in the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed. In addition, basically, the “overlay specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh R in the display column 706, and the “winning ball increase zone” is displayed in the eighth and subsequent R. As a result, the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first R display column 706. Note that, as described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the "overlay bonus" may be displayed in place of the "winning sphere increase zone" in the display field 706 after the 8th R. The “superimposition specialization zone” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the addition display of the scheduled prize ball number is performed with high probability. The “prize ball addition zone” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that a round game in which over winning is expected is in progress. The “addition bonus” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the player is in a round game in which an over prize due to the addition bonus can not be expected. In addition, the image 700 of the "addition bonus" displayed on the upper part of the display area 4A indicates the start of the addition bonus.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the second R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “30” is displayed in the second R (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703A of "+30" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the third R is started, the planned number of prize balls “270” to which the “+30” superimposition number 703A displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. In addition, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the third R (see FIG. 12), in the third R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (E), when the fourth R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, the fourth R is specified so that the number “105” of superimposition is displayed (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703B of "+105" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42F, when the 5th R is started, the scheduled award ball number “375” to which the “+105” superimposition number 703 B displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the fifth R (see FIG. 12), in the fifth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the sixth R is started, the same scheduled prize ball number “375” as the previous round is continuously displayed in the display column 705. In addition, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the sixth R (see FIG. 12), in the sixth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42H, when the seventh R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “270” is displayed in the seventh R (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703C of "+270" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th R is started, the scheduled award ball number "645" to which the "+270" superimposing number 703C displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 42I and FIG. 42J, in the display columns 706 of the eighth to sixteenth eyes, “a prize ball increase zone” is displayed. Furthermore, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 8th to 16th eyes (see FIG. 12), in the 8th to 16th eyes, the number of superimposed characters 702A and the number of overlays are in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the display column 705 displays that the planned prize ball number has finally become "645". Although the player can not substantially cause an over winning in the first half round due to the series display of the additional number and the planned number of prize balls, the second half round is based on the number of planned prize balls displayed additionally. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over-winning of the game, and to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), when small overlay bonus 2 according to hit pattern 6 is determined as the overlay bonus and small overlay pattern 5 is selected as the overlay pattern, display area 4A in the hit start interval is selected. On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, for example, the "animal" added character 702B selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the first R is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the first R, in the display field 704, an "animal" corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed. Even in the small-accumulation pattern 5, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12), in the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed at the center.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 (B) and 43 (C), the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh display columns 706. Furthermore, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 1st to 7th eyes (see FIG. 12), the 1st to 7th eyes have the overlay character 702B and the number of overlays in the center of the screen It is not displayed, and in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball number is continuously displayed without changing from the initial value "240".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the eighth R is started, the “addition bonus” is displayed in the display column 706. In addition, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the additional number “135” is displayed at the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the overlay character 702B is displayed in the center of the display area 4A. , And the added number 703D of "+135" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th R is started, the “winning sphere increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706. Further, in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball number "375" to which the additional number 703D of "+135" displayed in the previous round is added is displayed. Furthermore, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the overlay character 702A and the number of overlays are not displayed at the center of the screen after the 9Rs. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned prize ball number has finally become "375". Even with such a series of display of the number of additionals and the number of scheduled prize balls, the player can not substantially generate an over winning until a part of the second half round (1st R to 13th R), but is additionally displayed. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over winning until the final round (16R) by using the scheduled award ball number as a standard, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the no-addition bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the addition bonus and the no-addition pattern 1 is selected as the addition pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an added character 702C of, for example, "female" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled award ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the first R is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the first R, in the display field 704, "female" corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed. In pattern 1 without overlaying, it is defined that the number of overlays is not displayed in all rounds including the 1Rth eye (refer to FIG. 12), so in the 1Rth eye, the initial value “240” is displayed in the display column 705 The number of additions is not displayed at the center of the screen.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D, in the 1R to 16R eyes, the additional character 702B and the number of additional characters are not displayed at the center of the screen, and the planned winning number of balls is initial on the display column 705. It is continuously displayed without changing from the value "240". Note that, as shown in FIG. 44C and FIG. 44D, the “superimposition bonus” is simply displayed in the display field 706 after the 8th R.

  The added character may be made to appear according to the operation of the effect button, and the number of added may be displayed after the appearance. Also, with regard to the additional characters appearing after the 8th R and the additional characters appearing before the 7R, for example, the same person or a liking character may be different. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, “+15” for the number of winning balls may be displayed to cumulatively display the number of payouts or the number of scheduled payouts. In addition, with regard to the scheduled prize ball number, it is possible to indirectly indicate, for example, by light or sound, instead of directly displaying an assumed numerical value. In the "addition bonus", the addition display of the planned prize ball number is performed in the next round of the round displaying the addition number, but the addition indication of the planned prize ball number and the display of the addition number are displayed in the same round And the addition display of the planned number of prize balls may be performed in the next round of the round in which the number of additions is displayed.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls exceeding the specified number of winnings in the next round game during the interval between rounds in which the big winning opening 37 is in the closed state is the suppressing portion 430 (big winning opening shutter It is controlled to be time to flow to the upper surface of 37A. Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, control is performed in such a time that two or more game balls can pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A simultaneously. As a result, when the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closing state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, the number of gaming balls larger than the prescribed number of winnings flowing onto the special winning opening shutter 37A in the closing state. Since it is led to the big winning opening 37, over winning can be realized in a predetermined round game, and interest in the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, without changing the opening time of the big winning opening shutter 37A, by appropriately controlling the interval time between rounds where the big winning opening 37 is closed between the desired round game and the round game, The number of over winnings can be adjusted appropriately. That is, specifically, for the interval between rounds, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 which is relatively short (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is longer than that (interval patterns b to d) By providing six big hit gaming states, it is possible to make the number of winning balls awarded based on over winning according to the interval time between the rounds different, and for the plurality of big hit gaming states, the difference in the degree of advantage is Can be attached.

  In addition, the number of prize balls awarded each time the game ball wins in the big prize mouth 37, the number of times of execution of the round game, and the over prize which will be awarded in the big prize mouth 37 according to the interval time between rounds Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number, the number of expected prize balls in the big hit gaming state can be calculated in advance, and the number of expected prize balls can be notified as the number of additionals or initial value. As to whether or not the winning number of balls can be obtained, it is possible to give notice of novel contents with surprisingness and variety, and in turn, it is possible to enhance the interest to the jackpot gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the over winning is realized basically by adjusting the time interval between rounds after the 7th R, for example, by making the time of the hit start interval relatively long. You may make it possible to achieve an over winning from the 1R's.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Specs of gaming machines]
First, specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the big hit probability of the special symbol to be the big hit gaming state is 1 / 399.60 (164/65536) in the low probability (non-probability changing gaming state), the high probability ) Is 1 / 130.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol to be a small hit gaming state is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability fluctuation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. The first special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 1", the hit pattern 1 will be 16R as the number of rounds of the round game (of which the actual winning number is 7R for easy winning in the big prize port), the production mode of the big hit gaming state The bonus name shown is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10 and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is zero. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 1050. The probability (rush rate) to be "certainly 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" is hit pattern 2 and is given the number of rounds 16R (effectively the number of rounds 16R), the bonus name is "large bonus bonus", the bonus content is "large bonus addition" It is a bonus. In this "super-addition bonus", the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10, and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is twelve. As a result, in the "super-addition bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 2670. The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 2" is hit pattern 3 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "middle-on bonus 1", the bonus content is "middle It is an extra bonus 1 ". In the "middle additional bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10, and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is 11. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 1", the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535. Probability (rush rate) to be "certain 2" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 3", the hit pattern 4 will be given the number of rounds 16R (also the number of rounds 16R) is given as the bonus name "intermediate bonus 2", as the bonus content "inside It is an additional bonus 2 ". The "middle additional bonus 2" has an estimated number of winnings of 10th to 11Rth eyes, 10, an estimated number of winnings of 12Rth, 11 and an estimated number of winnings of 13R to 16R is 12. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 2", the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535. The probability (rush rate) to be “certain 3” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "4" is hit pattern 5 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus", the bonus content is "small addition" It is a bonus. In the "small advance bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings of the first to sixteenth eyes is set to ten. As a result, in the "small bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 2400. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 4" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The small hit is the same as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds.

  The special winning opening count corresponds to the specified winning number that triggers the end of one round game, and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count (predetermined winning number) is set to “10”. That is, when ten winnings to the special winning opening 37 are counted in one round, the round is considered to be ended. Also in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, a prize that exceeds the special winning opening count number is detected in one round, the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is paid out. Thereby, an over winning that exceeds the special winning opening count is possible. This point will be described later.

  The time saving performance, the number of winning balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the hitting probability of the normal symbols, the hitting number of the normal symbols, and the second starting opening winning number are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also be as follows. For example, with regard to the special symbol, the big hit probability at the low probability time and the high probability is not limited to the one described above. That is, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win a big hit at high probability than at low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the probability of winning in the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. With regard to the order of digesting the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be in the winning order without setting the priority, or the first special symbol may be prioritized. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Also, the probability change gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. In addition, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the extra bonus. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The time saving performance may be more than the ST number (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST number including, for example, 0 times. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls relating to the special winning opening is set to a value different from that described above, the planned number of winning balls is calculated using that value and the estimated number of winnings, and notification of the additional number described later is performed. You can do so. With regard to the ordinary symbol, the low probability time and the high probability time hitting probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the hit probability of the normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, for example, it may be winning at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the open patterns of the blade members be associated differently. The second starting opening winning number may be a value other than that described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening and closing patterns A to E are defined as the one round opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing patterns A to E are opening and closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening and closing pattern E among them is an opening and closing pattern also corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern C of the first embodiment, but the opening and closing patterns B to D of the present embodiment are those according to the first embodiment Differently, in one round game, it is defined to be open for a plurality of times (two times in the present embodiment).

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 2.64 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s and finally becomes the closed state. The opening and closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. The section in which the open state is 5.21 s or 3.00 s corresponds to the middle open because it is shorter than the long open of the opening / closing pattern A. The section that is closed for 2.64 s between the two middle openings is referred to as “interval during round” in the following description. That is, in the opening and closing pattern B, two middle opening operations occur at intervals of an interval in a round, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern B is 8.21 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is 5.21 s first, then the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is finally 3.00 s. The opening and closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from when it is first opened to when it is finally closed. Such opening / closing pattern C is also generated in such a manner that the middle opening twice occurs across the interval during the round, but the time during the round interval is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern B. The total open time of the opening and closing pattern C is 8.21 s, which is the same as that of the opening and closing pattern B.

  The open / close pattern D is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, then the closed state is 1.32 s, and then the open state is finally 3.00 s. The open / close pattern D is also defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. Such opening / closing pattern D is also generated in such a manner that the middle opening twice occurs across the interval during the round, but the time during the round interval is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern C. The total open time of the opening and closing pattern D is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern C.

  Among the opening and closing patterns A to E described above, the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing patterns A to D including the long open or the middle open where winning of the game ball is possible Applicable The round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing pattern E is a non-substantially round game that does not correspond to a substantially round game.

  In addition, as an opening and closing pattern of one round, the following contents may be sufficient. The open pattern is not limited to the above five types, and may be four or less or six or more. The opening and closing pattern A may not be 10 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 10 seconds or more than 10 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the opening and closing patterns B to D, the opening is made twice in one round, but the opening may be made three or more times. The time for opening the middle in the opening and closing patterns B to D may be any time as long as a predetermined number of gaming balls can be won. Furthermore, with regard to the opening and closing patterns B to D, the times of opening the middle may be made different from each other. The opening time of the middle opening can be appropriately set in accordance with the inter-round interval and the time of the in-round interval. For the opening and closing pattern E, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, for example, may be less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the big hit opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 6 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As an inter-round interval pattern, only an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern that occurs on a normal bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 7R. The hit pattern 1 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern E in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 specifies that the substantial round is the 7th round of the 1Rth to 7Rth, and the remaining 9th round of the 8Rth to 16Rth is executed as the non-substantially round.

  The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 2 is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the large-scale bonus that is executed as an effect with hit pattern 2, the prize ball number based on only the large winning opening count number (the prescribed number of prizes: 10) is 2400, and including the over prize, the planned prize ball number It will be 2670. Therefore, in the large addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and a number "570" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the scheduled number of winning balls is added in the first half round It is reported as a number.

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 1, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern C in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the middle additional bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2,400, and the planned number of prize balls is 2,535 if over winning is included. Therefore, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is also notified as an initial value in the middle added bonus 1 and "435" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the number of expected winning balls in the first half round It is reported as an additional number.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 2, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern D in the eighth to eleventh rounds, and the large winning in the 12th round The opening 37 is the opening and closing pattern C, and the large winning opening 37 is defined as the opening and closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th eyes. In the middle additional bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number of winning balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 2400, and the number of scheduled winning balls is 2535 including over winnings. Therefore, in the middle additional bonus 2, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the expected number of winning balls is the first half round or It is reported as an additional number in the second half round.

  The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern which is generated upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 5 is defined such that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern D in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the small additional bonus to be executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, the number of winning balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 2400, and the over winning is not detected. That is, the number of planned prize balls is also 2400. Therefore, in the small-accumulation bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "300" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the number of scheduled winning balls is added in the first half round It is reported as a number.

  The hit pattern 6 occurs in the small hit gaming state, and the large winning opening 37 is defined to be the open / close pattern E only once. That is, the hit pattern 6 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning of the game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as described later, on the assumption that the gaming balls are continuously fired, an interval during the round is set to the open / close patterns B to D, but the firing operation start time of the gaming balls is The interval time during the round may be defined as a reference. For example, as the interval time during the round, a time corresponding to a predetermined number of estimated maximum arrival times may be defined with reference to the time of the first middle opening or the launch operation start time. In addition, when it is considered that over winning is unlikely to occur, the corresponding time during the round interval is the number of winnings in the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and It is preferable that the total time with the number of game balls assumed to exist on the winning opening shutter be equal to or less than the prescribed number of winnings, and if it is a situation where over winning is likely to occur, the corresponding interval during the round The time is the sum of the number of winnings in the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the number of gaming balls assumed to be present on the big winning opening shutter in the interval during the round It is preferable to set the time to exceed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which over winning is easy and a situation in which it is difficult depending on the time of the interval during the round. For example, in the present embodiment, 2.64 s, which is the maximum interval time during a round, is defined as a time that can achieve 12 winnings per round (two over winnings), but 13 per round It may be a time when the above winnings are possible. However, since the time during the round interval tends to be unnaturally long as the number of over winnings is increased, it is preferable to set an appropriate time. Also, the hit pattern 1 may be one in which the same open / close pattern is assigned to all the rounds, or alternatively, the open / close pattern may be different only in some of the rounds. As a hit pattern, the interval between rounds may be different. In the hit patterns 2 to 5, the opening and closing patterns may be different in part or all of the rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different intervals between rounds.

[Add pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an addition pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 5, and defines various kinds of additional patterns to be determined and selection rates (%) when selecting the additional patterns by lottery.

  According to the added pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with hit pattern 2, large added patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as added patterns corresponding to the large added bonus. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the intermediate add patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the inner additional patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the small additional bonus.

  In addition, the selection rate for distributing the additional pattern to be a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. In the additional pattern selection table, the number of additional pattern patterns may be the same or may be different.

[Overlay pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table to be referred to in the during-round effect process (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described above. The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for effect and the round for notifying the addition according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds serving as reference items, and the number of additional servings to be determined. Also in the present embodiment, the additional number is notified along with the appearance of the additional character described later.

  According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large overlay pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes, and “270” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th eyes. The total number of additions of these is “570”.

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 1) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes, and “135” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th eyes. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "435".

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 2) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 5 to 9 as the additional addition pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 5, "100" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R eyes, and "30" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 8Rth to 10Rth eyes. “45” is notified as the additional number. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "435".

  According to the addition pattern table (small addition bonus) corresponding to the small addition bonus, the number of rounds and the number of additions to be notified are defined for each small addition pattern 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "300".

  It should be noted that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 49, and the additional number (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the scheduled ball number and the initial value may be distributed appropriately do it. In addition, after notifying the numerical value exceeding the above-mentioned total addition number as the addition number, by setting the numerical value notified to be subtracted, it may be made to finally become a predetermined total addition number. .

[Superimposed character lottery table]
FIG. 50 shows an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting the additional characters to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the notification of the additional number according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns serving as reference items, additional characters serving as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an additional character by lottery. As the additional characters, "animal", "female", and "pyrotechnician" are defined.

  For example, in the large additional patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character of the “Fireworks” is the highest. In the middle additional patterns 1 to 9, it is defined that the selection rates of the “female” and “Fireworksman” upper characters are generally high, and the selection rates of the “animal” upper characters are generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “animal” added character is high, the selection rate of the “female” added character is next high, and the selection rate of the “Fireworks teacher” added characters is generally low. It is prescribed. According to the added character appearing based on such added character lottery table, the kind of bonus will be suggested, and the degree of expectation to the winning ball is also raised from the added number notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  The selection rate for distributing additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, an additional pattern that can not be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the “animal” superimposed character can not be selected only in the large superimposable pattern, and the selective character is defined such that the “pyrophorist” superimposed character can be selected only in the middle super large pattern or the super superlacent pattern. May be

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the process similar to the thing by 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, only describing drawing number, a step number, etc. suitably.

  As processing of main CPU 61 in this embodiment, main processing, timer interruption processing, switch input processing, special symbol related switch check processing, first starting opening switch checking processing, second starting opening switch checking processing, special winning opening switch Check processing, special symbol control processing, special symbol storage check processing, special symbol determination processing, special symbol variation time management processing, special symbol display time management processing, special symbol game end processing, according to the first embodiment, FIGS. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, the description thereof is omitted.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In the hit start interval management process, the processes of S350 to S360 are performed as the processes similar to S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets one corresponding to any one of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This big winning a prize opening reopening waiting time question management processing performs the processing of S370-S377 as processing similar to S220-S227 which are shown in Figure 28 with 1st execution form. In the present embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets one corresponding to any one of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. In this big winning opening open processing, the processing of S380 to S392 is performed as substantially the same processing as S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S381, S382, and S387 are as follows.

  In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more, the process proceeds to S384. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “10” or more, the process proceeds to S382.

  In S382, the main CPU 61 executes the special winning opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round. According to this process, when the opening and closing patterns B to D are set, an interval during round which is closed during the round occurs. As a result, an over winning is realized in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the prescribed number of winnings using the interval during the round. In S382, a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S387, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In this embodiment, the inter-round interval display time is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In the hit end interval management process, the processes of S400 to S406 are performed as processes substantially similar to S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment. However, at S405, the main CPU 61 is configured to set "180" as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63.

  As processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing, and effect processing during rounds are shown in FIGS. 32-35 and 37 according to the first embodiment. The description is omitted because it is the same as in FIG.

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the hit effect pattern determination process, the process of S410 to S418 is performed as the process substantially similar to S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S410, S411, S414, and S417 are as follows.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of “01H” to “06H” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. As for the hit effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, and each of “02H” to “05H” corresponds to the large addition bonus, the middle addition bonus 1 and 2, the small addition bonus, and “06H” , Corresponding to small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S418.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 patterns are provided as the superposing patterns, and “01H” to “01H” of superposing pattern flags are provided for large superposing patterns 1 to 4, middle superposing patterns 1 to 9, and small superposing patterns 1 to 4. "11H" corresponds. When this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "2100" in the winning ball number counter. The value "2100" corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out according to 14R of the 16R round games, and is displayed as an initial value of the scheduled number of prize balls in the hit start interval. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In this hit / termination effect processing, the processing of S420 to S424 is performed as substantially the same processing as S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S420 and S422 are as follows.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional bonus is ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S421. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "05H", the processing is shifted to S422.

  In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, data of effect contents different according to any of the normal bonus, the additional bonus, and the small hit is set as the end effect data. When this process ends, the process moves to S423.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an over winning occurs in the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  57 and 58 are diagrams for describing the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when the over winning occurs. FIGS. 57 and 58 schematically show the behavior from the interval between the rounds immediately before 7R in the super-addition bonus to 7R, and after the end of the 7R, the interval between the rounds to reach the 8Rs again. The game ball is continuously fired and reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37 in the case of the open state) after 3.1s uniformly. . Each game ball is given an order such as (1), (2), ... or (1 '), (2'), ... in order of firing, but for convenience, once the round is switched, (1) or (1) The order is attached in order from ').

  First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 at an interval between rounds immediately before the start of the 7R's eye. The interval time between the rounds is shorter than 0.66 s, which corresponds to approximately the firing interval at which the game ball reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A first after the large winning opening shutter 37A is closed. In the embodiment, since it is 0.3 s, the gaming ball has not reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), 7R starts when the interval time between rounds elapses, and the special winning opening shutter 37A opens the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. It will be in the state. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, the game ball (1) fired in the interval between rounds is in the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 not shown. It rolls up to.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the gaming ball (1) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 which has been opened, and the winning combination is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. . That is, the first winning of the prescribed number of winnings “10” is detected. Thereafter, the gaming balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the special winning opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval and fall downward, and winning is sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the next game ball (10) also passes downward through the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and a winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. It will be done. As a result, by detecting a winning corresponding to the last of the prescribed winning number “10”, the 7th R is ended, and the inter-round interval before the 8th R is started is started. At this time, approximately 9.8 s have elapsed from the start of the shooting operation of the gaming ball (1). The time 9.8 s, the time 3.1 s for the first game ball (1) to reach the part corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, and the game ball (1) is a big winning opening count switch 370 And the time required to fire the ten game balls (1) to (10) is calculated from the sum of the time interval of 0.66 s × 10. Therefore, in the seventh R, which is in the open state for a maximum of 10 s, winnings of the ten gaming balls (1) to (10) can be sufficiently detected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), by the interval between rounds being started again, the big winning opening shutter 37A protrudes in the direction of the white arrow to close the big winning opening 37 again. Do. At this time, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1 ') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in the closed state.

  Then, when the time interval of 0.3 s between the rounds has elapsed, the 8th R starts, and as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the special winning opening shutter 37A retracts in the direction of the white arrow to make a special winning opening. Leave 37 open. At this time, since the gaming ball (1 ') has reached a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming ball (1') passes through the special winning opening 37 in an open state. Then, the game is dropped downward, and a winning prize is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58H, the gaming balls (2 ′) to (7 ′) and the gaming balls (8 ′) (not shown) pass through the big winning opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval. It falls downward and the winnings are sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. When the game ball (8 ') is detected, counting from the start of the 8th R, the time when the first game ball (1') is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is 0.26 s, 7 By setting the time required to fire each of the game balls (2 ') to (8') to a firing interval of 0.66 s × 7, approximately after 4.88 s. That is, in the eighth R, approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the time (5.21 s) to be the first middle opening.

  When the time 5.21 s for the first middle opening in this 8th R has passed, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the special winning opening shutter 37A becomes the special winning opening 37 once by becoming an interval during the round. It is closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58 (H), that is, when approximately 5.5 4 s has elapsed since the start of the 8th R, the next game ball (9 ′) is a special winning opening shutter Reach the right end of 37A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until 2.64 s, which is the time specified as the interval during the eighth round, has passed. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') pass from the right to the left in a line. At this time, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') sequentially reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and further rotate at a speed advancing about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. I will move. As a result, the four gaming balls (9 ') to (12') are positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. In short, when counting from the state time point of FIG. 58 (H), the state of FIG. 58 (J) is after about 2.64 s has elapsed, and becomes about the time when about 7.52 s has elapsed since the 8Rs start point. That is, in the interval during the 8Rth round, four game balls (9 ') to (12') can be sufficiently present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A by the end of the interval.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), when the interval during the eighth round of the round ends, the second middle opening is made, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is retracted in the direction of the white arrow to make the special winning opening 37 Again to the open state. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four gaming balls (9 ') to (12') pass simultaneously through the large winning opening 37 in the open state and fall downward, and four large winning opening count switches 370 A winning combination of is detected. That is, in the first middle opening in one round game, winnings for eight are detected, and then, in the middle opening immediately after the interval during the round in the same round playing, winnings for four are detected. As a result, an over winning that exceeds the prescribed number of winnings by two will occur. Similarly, assuming that the interval time during the round is 1.98 s, for example, it can be easily understood that 12 + 1 over wins occur, and if 1.32 s, the over win does not occur.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows operation timings in the large additional bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. The “launched state”, “playing state”, “time required”, “big winning opening”, “number of balls on the shutter”, “elapsed time after changing the number of balls on the shutter”, and “state shown” It is the same as the item shown in 41.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the gaming balls are being fired continuously, the time when the first gaming ball (1) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370 from the start point of time 7R is approximately 0. 0. 26s, the time required for the next nine game balls (2) to (10) to fire is 0.66 s × 9 = 5.94 s, and the last game ball (10) is by the large winning opening count switch 370 Since the time to be detected is approximately 0.1 s, an open time of approximately 6.3 s, which is the total of these, is obtained.

  After that, the interval between rounds after the 7th R is started, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 0.3s, but the next game ball (1 ') has not yet reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the special winning opening shutter 37A There are no game balls on the top of the game.

  Then, when the 8th R is started and the first middle opening is started, the winning of approximately 8 game balls (1 ') to (8') is detected within the defined time of 5.21s. This is the time when the first game ball (1 ') is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 from the time of the 8R start is approximately 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for the firing of 8) is 0.66 s × 7 = 4.62 s of the firing interval, it is clear also from the time to be the sum of these.

  After that, the first middle opening is finished, and the eighth Rth in-round interval starts. In the interval during this round, the big winning opening 37 is once closed for 2.64 s. At this time, the time for the next ninth game ball (9 ') to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A from the start of the interval during the round is approximately 0.33 s, and the next three games Since the time required for the balls (10 ') to (12') to fire is 0.66 s × 3 = 2.31 s, the total number of them is 4.64 s, which is the sum of them. 9 ') to (12') are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  After that, when the interval during the 8th round is over and the big winning opening 37 is opened by the second middle opening again, the four gaming balls (9 ') on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A-( 12 ') passes through the special winning opening 37, and four winning combinations are detected. When the winning of one game ball is detected among them, the big winning opening 37 is closed, the 8th R is finished, and the next interval between rounds is started. That is, as the opening and closing pattern of the 8th R, up to 8 winnings can be detected in the first middle opening, and up to 4 winnings can be detected in the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64 s, which allows 10 + 2 over winnings for the entire 8th R. Similarly, by setting the interval time during the round to 1.98 s, 10 + 1 over wins are enabled, and by setting the interval during the round to 1.32 s, the over win is not detected. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of two over winnings are realized by appropriately setting an interval time mainly in the round, but three or more over winnings may be possible. However, when three or more over winnings are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least four gaming balls to pass simultaneously, or the time for the first middle opening is set appropriately. Is preferred.

[Example of screen display of bonus bonus]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display of an additional bonus. The figure shows a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1.

  First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), when the large additional bonus according to hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large added pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A of, for example, a "Fireworksman" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+2100" of the planned prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the 1R is started, a display field 704 showing the type of the additional character and the scheduled number of balls per addition of the additional number are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. And a display field 706 for displaying the second half round as the "winning sphere increase zone", with the period of the first half round as the "addition specialization zone". Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the sixteenth round is completed. For example, in the display field 704, the "Fireworksman" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the sixteenth round is over. On the other hand, after the superimposition number is displayed in the center of the screen in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball count to which the superimposition number is added is additionally displayed. In the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of overlays “100” is displayed in the first R (see FIG. 49), after the overlay character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, An additional number 703A of +100 "is displayed. In addition, basically, the “overlay specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh R in the display column 706, and the “winning ball increase zone” is displayed in the eighth and subsequent R. As a result, the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first R display column 706.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), when the second R is started, the scheduled award ball number “2200” is obtained by adding the “+100” superimposition number 703A displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the second R (see FIG. 49), in the second R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, when the third R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “100” is displayed in the third R (see FIG. 49). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the screen of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703B of "+100" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, when the fourth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2300” to which the “+100” superimposition number 703 B displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed in the fourth R (see FIG. 49), the overlay character 702A and the number of overlays are not displayed in the center of the screen in the fourth R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60F, when the fifth R is started, it is specified that the number of additions “100” is displayed in the fifth R in the large overlay pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, after the superimposed character 702A is displayed, the superimposed number 703C of "+100" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60G, when the sixth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2400” to which the “+100” superimposition number 703 C displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the sixth R (see FIG. 49), in the sixth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60H, when the seventh R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “270” is displayed in the seventh R (see FIG. 49). At the center of the display area 4A, after the superimposed character 702A is displayed, the superimposed number 703D of "+270" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60I, when the eighth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2670” to which the “+270” superimposition number 703 D displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 60I and FIG. 60J, in the display columns 706 of the eighth to sixteenth eyes, “a prize ball increase zone” is displayed. Furthermore, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 8th to 16th eyes (see FIG. 49), in the 8th to 16th eyes, the number of superimposed characters 702A and the number of overlays are in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the display column 705 displays that the planned prize ball number has finally become "2670". Although the player can not substantially cause an over winning in the first half round due to the series display of the additional number and the planned number of prize balls, the second half round is based on the number of planned prize balls displayed additionally. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over-winning of the game, and to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

[Effect of game machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the predetermined round game, the first middle opening time to open the large winning opening 37 is launched with gaming balls smaller than the prescribed winning number (10), and the large winning opening The time required to pass the shutter 37A, specifically, the time when winning is detected for eight gaming balls, is controlled, and then the big winning opening 37 is once closed in the interval during the round The time is controlled so as to be the time for three or four game balls to be over-wined on the basis of the previous eight balls to flow into the suppression portion 430 (upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A). There is.

  Thereby, in the round game, when it becomes the second middle opening next time, a maximum of 12 game balls larger than the specified winning number are large from the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in combination with the previous middle opening. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Therefore, over winning can be realized in a predetermined round game, and interest in the jackpot gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, in a predetermined round game, the winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times, and by appropriately controlling the time of the interval during the round that is temporarily closed among them, the number of over winnings is appropriately adjusted. can do.

  In addition, as a round game where over winning is possible, for example, the opening and closing pattern D of a relatively short time is included in the interval time during the round, without changing the time when the big winning opening shutter 37A is first opened to the middle. By providing the jackpot pattern 5 and the jackpot pattern 2 and 3 including the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern C for a relatively long time, the over winning number is made according to the interval time during the round. The number of winning balls to be paid out can be made different based on the number of jackpots, and the degree of advantage can be differentiated only by appropriately setting the interval time during the round for a plurality of big hit gaming states.

  In addition, the prize winning prize 37 is awarded according to the number of prize balls awarded each time the gaming ball wins in the big prize mouth 37, the number of times of execution of the round game, and the time of middle opening and interval time during the round. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number of over winnings, the number of expected prize balls in the big hit gaming state can be calculated in advance, and the number of expected prize balls can be notified as an additional number or initial value. With regard to how much the number of winning balls can be obtained in the state, it is possible to notify of novel contents with surprisingness and variety, and as a result, it is possible to enhance interest in the jackpot gaming state.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the specifications of the gaming machine of the third embodiment are substantially the same as those according to the first embodiment, but no small hit is provided, the number of prescribed wins is two, and the prescribed number of rounds is set to 3R. It is done.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
First, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening and closing patterns A to C are defined as the one round opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B of the first embodiment. The open / close pattern C of the present embodiment is similar to the open / close pattern C of the second embodiment, but the open state first becomes 0.6 s, then the closed state becomes 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s The opening and closing pattern is finally closed after the The opening and closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from the opening state first to the final closing state. Such an open / close pattern C is an open short first, and then a second open occurs as a middle open across an interval during a round. The total opening time of the opening and closing pattern C is 3.6 s. The substantial round game in the jackpot gaming state corresponds to all of the opening and closing patterns A to C described above.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 4 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As a pattern of the inter-round interval, an interval pattern a in which the closing time is 0.3 s and an interval pattern b in which the closing time is 2.97 s are defined. The hit pattern 1 corresponds to the additional bonus A, and is a hit pattern in which the prescribed number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are 3R. The hit pattern 1 is such that all rounds of the 1st to 3rd eyes are the open / close pattern A, and the inter-round interval between the 1st and 2nd eyes and between the 2nd and 3rd eyes is the interval pattern a It is prescribed. In such a hit pattern 1 (superimposition bonus A), two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected in the 1st to 3rd eyes. As a result, in the hit pattern 1 added bonus A, the planned number of balls becomes 90.

  The hit pattern 2 corresponds to the bonus B, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 2 is defined such that the first R is the open / close pattern A and the second R and the third R are the open / close pattern B. In addition, an inter-round interval between the first and second R's and between the second and third R's is defined to be an interval pattern b. In such a hit pattern 2 (superimposed bonus B), while two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected at the 1Rth, the time interval between rounds before the 2Rs start and the 3Rs start is relatively long. Since the interval pattern b is selected, 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R and 3R eyes. As a result, in the hit pattern 2 added bonus B, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  The hit pattern 3 corresponds to the additional bonus C, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the first R is the open / close pattern A and the second R and the third R are the open / close pattern C. Also, an inter-round interval between the first and second R's and between the second and third R's is defined to be an interval pattern a. In such hit pattern 3 (superimposed bonus C), two wins equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the 1Rth, while relatively long closing time (1.98) rounds in the 2Rs and 3Rs. Since a middle interval is provided, after one winning combination is detected in the first open state in each of the 2R and 3R eyes, 1 + 2 over prizes are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round Be done. As a result, in the hit pattern 3 added bonus C, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  The hit pattern 4 corresponds to the additional bonus D, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the first R is an open / close pattern A, the second R is an open / close pattern B, and the third R is an open / close pattern C. Also, the inter-round interval between the 1Rth and 2Rth is defined as the interval pattern b, and the inter-round interval between the 2R and 3Rth is defined as the interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 4 (superimposed bonus D), two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected at the 1Rth, while an interval pattern b with a relatively long interval between rounds before the start of the 2Rs Therefore, 2 + 2 over wins are detected in the 2Rth eye, and an interval during the round with a relatively long closing time (1.98) is provided in the 3Rth, so that in the first open state in the 3Rth eye After one winning is detected, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the hit pattern 3 added bonus D, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  In the third embodiment, as in the above-described hit pattern 4, a round (2Rth) for realizing 2 + 2 over wins by an interval between rounds and a round (3R) for achieving 1 + 3 over wins by an interval during the round Although it is characterized in that one is mixed with the eyes, the number of defined rounds of all or part of the hit patterns may be different after defining at least one hit pattern having such content. Further, as the types of the inter-round interval and the interval during the round, more types may be provided according to the specification.

[Table for selecting additional bonus effect pattern]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a table for selecting an additional bonus effect pattern. The addition bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining an addition pattern, an addition character, and an addition number according to the type of the addition bonus as the effect contents during the round. An additional bonus effect pattern selection table is provided for each additional bonus A to D, and the number of rounds serving as reference items, the additional pattern serving as a determination item, the additional character, and the number of additional items, and various determination items by lottery. It defines the selectivity (%) for selection. At the hit start interval before the start of the first bonus bonus R, the additional character appears and "60" is displayed as the initial value of the scheduled prize ball number. Further, the addition bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and the addition pattern, the addition character, and the number of additions are determined in the hit effect pattern determination process.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus A) associated with the addition bonus A, the addition patterns A-1 to A-4 corresponding to the addition bonus A, "women" and "animal" addition characters And the number of additions to be notified for each round number is selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the "female" super character is selected in the super pattern A-1, the super-number "30" is reported in the first R, and the super-number is not reported in the second R and the third R. A numerical value "90" obtained by summing the additional number notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus B) associated with the addition bonus B, the addition patterns B-1 to B-4 corresponding to the addition bonus B, and the addition of the "Fireworksman" and "Woman" A character and an additional number to be notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, in the case where the “Fireworkman” superimposing character is selected in the superposing pattern B-1, the number “30” of superimposing is notified in each of the 1st to 3rd eyes. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus C) associated with the addition bonus C, the addition patterns C-1 to C-6 corresponding to the addition bonus C, "Fireworksman", "Woman", " An “over” character of “animal” and the number of additions notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the “Fireworks teacher” super character is selected in the super pattern C-1, the number “30” of the number added is notified in the 1Rth, the number “10” added in the 2Rth is reported, and the number 3rd added the number The number "50" is informed. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus D) associated with the addition bonus D, the addition patterns D-1 to D-6 corresponding to the addition bonus D, "Fireworksman", "Woman", " An “over” character of “animal” and the number of additions notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the "Fireworks teacher" super character is selected in the super pattern D-1, the number "30" of the number added is notified in the first R, the number "40" is reported in the second R, and the number R is added in the third R The number "20" is informed. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for distributing the additional pattern, the number of additional items, etc., which are the determination items in the additional bonus effect pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. The addition bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. The additional number may be defined, for example, to be notified collectively in the first R. Although the initial value of the scheduled prize ball number is "60" as an example, the initial value may be set to "90", for example, so that the additional number may not be notified in the additional bonus A.

[Effect of game machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment can be obtained, the following effects can also be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the over play is controlled by controlling the time of the interval pattern between rounds which can realize the over winning by controlling the time of the interval during the round as the interval pattern b. Since it is possible to provide the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 4 that includes both of the achievable open / close pattern B and the round game, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the big hit gaming state. Also, for example, as in hit pattern 3 and hit pattern 4, a big hit gaming state in which over winning can be achieved by a round game (for example, 3R eyes) which is opened twice across an interval during a round There is a big hit gaming state in which an over winning can be achieved even in a round game (1R and 2R eyes) which is opened only once. That is, in any of the big hit gaming states of hitting patterns 2 to 4, an over winning exceeding the prescribed winning number can be realized in one round game, so that the interest to the big hitting gaming state can be further enhanced.

<First modified example of large winning opening shutter>
Next, a first modified example of the special winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
[Specifications of the large winning opening shutter according to the first modification]
First, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 64 as well, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37B (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 etc. for the sake of convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the diameter d of the gaming ball is 11 mm, for example, the large winning opening shutter 37B has a longitudinal dimension L1 of about d × 12 = 132 mm. As a result, up to 12 gaming balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state. However, also in this modification, a firing interval until one game ball is fired after one game ball is fired according to the firing operation start, and one game ball is fired By taking into consideration the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be supposed to pass simultaneously. In addition, the longest time until the game ball which has reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 is about 1.32s, and the shortest time of the inter-round interpal is 1 It is set to be about .32 s (may be 1.32 s or more). Thus, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball that has won in the previous round game until the special winning opening 37 is in the open state again. Further, in the inter-round interpal, it may be possible that gaming balls exceeding the prescribed winning number can not be present on the big winning opening shutter 37B. The time required for the large winning opening shutter 37B to move from one of the positions to the other of the opening position and the closing position of the large opening 37 is the embodiment described above. It is similar to

  When applying such a large winning opening shutter 37B, the number of shots per minute is 90.90 / min, and the firing interval is 0.66 seconds, as in the above-described embodiment, and it is possible to greatly increase the shooting preparation position. It takes approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds as the time to reach the right end of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B is an inclined surface which advances by 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. The other points are also the same as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, up to six game balls can be substantially simultaneously passed.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, an operation example when an over winning occurs when the special winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

  FIGS. 65 and 66 are diagrams for describing the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B when the over winning occurs. Although FIGS. 65 and 66 schematically show the behavior from the hit start interval to the 1st R to the 4th r start, the interval between the rounds and the open time between each round are different from those according to the embodiment described above. It is different. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... in order of firing regardless of the update of the round. Also, the prescribed winning number is “3” as an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 65A, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 at the hit start interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when the specified time of the hit start interval has elapsed, the first R starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37B retracts the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the outlined arrow. Leave open. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the gaming ball (1) fired after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first R roll to the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in the open state.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the gaming ball (1) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 which has been opened, and the high winning opening count switch 370 detects a winning. . At this time, since the number of first R winnings has not reached the prescribed number of winnings "3", the large winning opening 37 continues to be open.

  Then, when approximately 1.32s have elapsed from the state of FIG. 65 (D), as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the third gaming ball (3) is a part corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370, and the big winning opening shutter 37B closes the big winning opening 37 accordingly, and the interval between rounds before the 2Rs start starts .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), when the special winning opening shutter 37B is in the state of completely closing the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the 2R eye, the gaming ball (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 65 (F) is approximately 1.32s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the second R is started, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, since the gaming balls (4) and (5) are in the passing state, the two gaming balls (4) and (5) are opened The large winning opening 37 is simultaneously passed and dropped downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects two winnings. Furthermore, the next game ball (6) has rolled to the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and this game ball (6) will also soon be winning. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the start of the third R starts. Such a state of FIG. 65 (G) is approximately 1.72s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 0.4s after the second R is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66H, when the large winning opening shutter 37B completely closes the large winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the third R, the game balls (7) to (7) 12) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (H) is approximately 3.76 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and is 4.02 s after counting from the state of FIG. 65 (G). Thus, in order to generate the state in which the six game balls (7) to (12) exist on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B, the interval time between rounds before the start of the third R is approximately 3 with a margin. It is set to about .96s.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the third R is started, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, since the gaming balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six gaming balls (7) to (12) are in the open state. The large winning opening 37 is simultaneously passed and dropped downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the third R in which the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over wins are detected. In the state of FIG. 66 (I), approximately 3.97 s has elapsed from the start of the inter-round interval, adding the time 0.01 s required for the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the 4Rs start is started. Thereafter, the gaming ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (J) is approximately 0.06s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), when the special winning opening shutter 37B is in the state of completely closing the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the 4R-th start, the game ball (13) to (18) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (K) is approximately 3.36s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the fourth R starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, while the gaming ball (13) does not fall into the special winning opening 37 by moving outward from the left end, the following gaming balls (14) to (18) These six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open state because there is the game ball (19) which has reached the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B while being in the existing state. It passes through the mouth 37 all at once and falls downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, even immediately after the start of the fourth round in which the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over wins are detected. The state of FIG. 66 (L) is such that the time required for the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening shutter 37B is 0.01s after the start of the fourth R and approximately 3.97s after the start of the interval between rounds. .

[Effect of game machine of the first modification]
As described above, the over winning can also be realized by appropriately setting the specified winning number and the time interval between rounds using the special winning opening shutter 37B. In addition, for example from the state of FIG. 66 (G) until a certain amount of time when the winning of the game ball (6) becomes possible elapses, the special winning opening 37 is opened, but from the state of FIG. 66 (G) The closed state is made immediately, specifically, it is closed about 0.1 s from the start of the round, and then the big prize hole 37 is temporarily closed for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do so. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 2 over winnings are realized. Can. If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 seconds, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 3 over winnings can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 seconds, four gaming balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 4 over winnings can be realized. Of course, the over winning may be realized only by adjusting the time between the round intervals without providing the interval during the round.

<Second Modification of Game Board and Variable Winning Device>
Next, a second modification of the gaming board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the gaming board 1 includes the second large winning opening 37 which can be over-wined in the same manner as the large winning opening of the first embodiment etc. A large winning opening 36 is provided. The first large winning opening 36 is provided at the top of the game area 1 p. The first large winning opening 36 is provided with a first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same. The first large winning opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first large winning opening 36 by tilting in the front-rear direction. Such a first large winning opening shutter 36A is in a first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passage area (first large winning hole 36) and in a second mode in which the first big winning hole shutter 36A is in a difficult closing state. To realize a variable member that can change. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening count switch 370, and the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A have the same functions as those according to the above-described embodiment. It is provided. Although not shown in the drawings, a first large winning opening count switch and a first large winning opening shutter solenoid are also provided in association with the first large winning opening 36 having the same function as these. That is, when the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected by the first big winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a preset number of gaming balls as a winning ball. In addition, the first big winning opening shutter solenoid for driving the first big winning opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can be won to the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. Be done. The opening drive of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A may be controlled exclusively with the opening driving of the second large winning opening 37 in the big hit gaming state. That is, for example, in the first R, the second large winning opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and in the meantime, the first large winning opening 36 is continuously closed, and in the next 2R, Control is possible such that the first large winning opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the second large winning opening 37 is continuously closed during that time.

  The second guide rail 30 'is similar to the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. That is, the second guide rail 30 'is not provided with a protrusion that can contact the gaming ball. Therefore, the gaming balls flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'are released from the lower end 30A' of the second guide rail 30 'without being decelerated. The lower end 30A 'of the second guide rail 30' is located in the vicinity of the upper right side of the second large winning opening 37 and is curved so as to discharge the game ball generally in the left direction. Thereby, the game ball released from the lower end 30A 'of the second guide rail 30' hits the right end portion of the second large winning opening shutter 37A when the second large winning opening shutter 37A described later is in the closed state. At the beginning of contact, they move leftward while rolling along the top surface.

  The second big winning opening shutter 37A is formed to have the same dimensions as those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like, but the upper surface thereof is a relatively gentle downward sloping inclined surface in the closed state. The upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the second large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, and is inclined downward to the right like the second large winning opening shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has an effect of decelerating the plurality of gaming balls moved along the upper surface of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. That is, on the upper surface of the second large winning opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, the speed of the game ball advancing in the left direction is effectively reduced by being inclined downward to the right. Initially, all game balls advancing along the left turn to the right in the middle of advancing to the left, and are led outward from the right end of the second big winning opening shutter 37A. An out port 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. Thus, the gaming balls guided outward from the right end of the second big winning opening shutter 37A are collected through the out port 41. Although not particularly shown, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, so that the advancing speed of the gaming ball is also effectively reduced. The upper surface 43 a of the cover member 43 and the second large winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A form the suppression portion 430. Also, with regard to the second big winning opening shutter and the cover member, among the gaming balls progressing along these, some gaming balls are guided outward from the right end of the big winning opening shutter, while the remaining games The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the ball is led outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effect of game machine of the second modification]
According to the gaming machine of such a second modification, when the second large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the gaming balls are easily congested on the upper surface thereof, and more gaming balls can be used as the second large winning opening Since it can be made to stay on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, the degree of expectation for the over winning can be raised while making the whereabouts of the gaming ball interested.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine of the second modification, the second large winning opening 37 or the first winning state that has become open the round game with the possibility of over winning and the round game without the possibility of over winning. It can be easily recognized only by confirming the special winning opening 36. In short, for example, it is difficult to make an over winning by opening and closing only the first large winning opening 36 in the first half round of the 1R to 7R eyes, while opening and closing only the second large winning opening 37 in the second half of the 8R to 16R eyes The over winning can be made possible. In such a case, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is opened and the time when over winning is difficult and the second big winning opening shutter 37A is opened and the time when over winning is possible As it is possible to distinguish clearly, for example, in the first half of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to concentrate on the effect display of the extra bonus, while in the second half of the big hit gaming state to generate over winnings It can be enhanced.

<Third Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a third modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise stated, it means the form etc. when the big winning opening is in a closed state. The variable winning prize device according to the third modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, in the third modification, the variable winning device 90 is different from those according to the above-described embodiment and the modification. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening / closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening / closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper cover 924, a drive unit 925, and the like. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b that is slightly inclined to the left is formed as a portion corresponding to the special winning opening shutter. The front base plate 920 and the front 922a and the shutter surface 922b of the main stage 922 are located on the front side of the game board 1, and one of the back base member 921, the other part of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the upper cover 924 The unit and the drive unit 925 are disposed on the back side of the game board 1.

  The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a right upper surface 91a and a left upper surface 91a 'on the right and left sides of the upper portion. Between the right upper surface 91a and the left upper surface 91a ', an opening 91c serving as a large winning opening 37 is formed. Since an introduction portion 920c described later is positioned above the right upper surface 91a, the game ball B hardly contacts the upper surface 91a.

  The front base plate 920 is provided in the through portion 1 c provided on the game board 1 so as to reach the back surface from the game area 1 p. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a at the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the through portion 1c. In the center of the right end of the opening 920a, the game ball B guided forward along the step surface 922c of the main stage 922 described later is on the shutter surface 922b in the closed state or the big winning opening 37 in the open state. A dischargeable discharger 920 b is provided. At the upper right end of the opening 920a, an introduction part 920c for guiding the game ball B which has flowed down to a guide path 924b of the upper cover 924 described later is provided. Such a front base plate 920 doubles as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back side of the game board 1, as shown in FIGS. The main stage 922 is supported on the upper portion of the back base member 921 so as to be able to tilt in the front-rear direction via a first axis 921a extending in the left-right direction, The upper stage 923 is supported so as to be capable of tilting in the front-rear direction via 921 b. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be vertically displaceable by a predetermined distance, and the main stage 922 is displaced from the position where the large winning opening 37 is closed to the position where the shutter surface 922b is open. At the time of tilting, the shaft 921a is displaced from the high position to the low position. At the bottom of the back base member 921, a drive unit 925 is disposed. Further, the left side portion of the back base member 921 is provided with a recovery port 921c capable of recovering the game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922 described later (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a step surface 922c. A plurality of upright front portions 922a are formed on the front end of the step surface 922c so as to face the cover member 91, and a plurality of shutter surfaces 922b are formed on the front portions 922a. The convex portions 922 d are provided at predetermined intervals. The step surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have steps that become lower as it goes from the rear to the front. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface having a slight downward tendency, and is also an inclined surface which descends to the right, to the left, and to the right as it goes from the upper stage to the middle stage and to the lower stage. According to such a step surface 922c, a passage is formed which leads the game ball B from the upper stage to the lower stage while meandering left and right. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b and is directly collected through the collection port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e that can be in contact with the game balls B are also provided at predetermined intervals in the step portion of the step surface 922c of each step. Such a main stage 922 can be tilted back and forth by a drive unit 925, as shown in FIGS. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front, the step surface 922c also has a relatively steep inclination to the front, and the front part 922a and the shutter surface 922b are in the opening 920a. Move down. Thus, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front portion 922a is enlarged, and the plurality of game balls B on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time through the gap.

  The upper stage 923 is adjacent to the upper portion of the main stage 922, and has an upper surface 923a having a level difference higher than the uppermost step surface 922c of the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is an inclined portion which is lower than the both ends and is inclined downward to the front, and the gaming ball B naturally moves to the step surface 922c generally through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923 a of the upper stage 923 through the introduction portion 920 c and a guide path 924 b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922 b is in the closed state, the front end of the upper stage 923 is provided with a plurality of convex portions 923 e that can be in contact with the game ball B at predetermined intervals. Such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922 as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is inclined downward to the front, the upper surface 923a also has a relatively steep inclination to the front, and the plurality of gaming balls B on the upper surface 923a are all at once. It will be led to the step surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. In addition, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the open state.

  The upper lid 924 covers the step surface 922c and the upper stage 923 of the main stage 922, and has a guiding path 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guiding path 924 b is formed to guide the gaming ball B from the introducing portion 920 c to the upper surface 923 a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924 c is arranged to face each step surface with an interval through which the game ball B can pass between the inner wall 924 c and each step surface of the main stage 922. Further, on the inner wall 924c, a plurality of convex portions 924e capable of coming into contact with the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. With the inner wall 924c, the convex portion 924e, the step surface 922c, and the convex portion 922e, the passage as the passage which suppresses the progress of the game ball B while meandering the game ball B laterally along the step surface 922c of each step Portions 930 are formed. Such an upper cover 924 also serves as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922 and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h It has two rotational position sensors 925j and 925k. The driving force of the driving motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the driving gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown), and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply a predetermined signal.

  Cylindrical peripheral walls are formed on the driven gears 925e and 925f, and inward projecting pieces 9250e that abut on the semi-helical cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h on the peripheral walls. , 9250f are provided. Further, on the peripheral wall of one driven gear 925e, two outwardly facing projecting pieces 9251e and 9252e are provided so as to be detected by the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k at a predetermined rotational position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are inserted into the driven gears 925e and 925f in a state of being always urged upward via the springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided on the upper portion of the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and the cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower portion of the main stage 922. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotational position where the projecting piece 9251e is detected by the rotational position sensor 925k, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f abut on the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, as shown in FIG. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained in the low position against the biasing force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotational position detected by the rotational position sensor 925j, as shown by the phantom line in the same figure. In this state, since the projecting pieces 9250e, 9250f abut on the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g, 9250h, as shown in FIG. 76, the lifting pipes 925g, 925h are maintained at the high position. As a result, the main stage 922 is in a non-inclined posture, and the big winning opening 37 is in a closed state. Furthermore, after the big winning opening 37 is closed, when it is opened again, the driven gears 925e, 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, whereby the projecting pieces 9250e, 9250f The cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h are pressed while rotating while being in contact with the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state as shown in FIG. 77 is obtained again, and the special winning opening 37 is in the open state. That is, the main stage 922 is in the inclined attitude and the non-inclined attitude each time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and the big winning opening 37 is brought into the open state and the closed state accordingly.

[Effect of game machine of the third modification]
According to the gaming machine of the third modification, the game ball B is guided to the suppressing portion 930 to operate its advancing speed effectively without operating the other members besides tilting the main stage 922. The plurality of gaming balls B suppressed by the suppressing portion 930 can be simultaneously led to the big winning opening 37 as the shutter surface 922 b is opened. As a result, the number of passes of the game ball B to the big winning opening 37 can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device etc., and an increase in the number of parts and cost increase can be suppressed and heat problems around the game board can be solved. can do.

  In addition, the game ball B rolling the game area 1p is made to flow into the suppressing portion 930 through the introducing portion 920c and the guiding path 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b. Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end to the front end on the lower side without damage, the shutter surface 922b can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, also in the step surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930, the advancing speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated and suppressed by the meandering passage and the convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e, and the advancing can be further delayed. it can.

  In addition, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front side of the game board 1 to the suppression unit 930 on the back side, a sufficient distance for reducing and suppressing the progression speed of the game ball B is secured. be able to.

  Further, in the suppressing portion 930, the plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e can form a passage capable of effectively suppressing the progression of the gaming ball B, and the plurality of gaming faces by the step surface 922c having a downward trend. The balls B can be simultaneously led to the big winning opening 37, and the over winning can be easily realized.

  In addition, not all of the game balls B whose progress has been suppressed in the suppression unit 930 are not led to the large winning opening 37, but a part thereof is led out of the game area 1p through the collection opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth Modified Example of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fourth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 3rd modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. The variable winning prize apparatus according to the fourth modification is mainly different from that according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning prize device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  In the main stage 922 of the fourth modified example, the shutter surface 922 b is formed on the front portion 922 a, but no convex portion is provided. Of course, a convex portion may be provided. In addition, the convex portion is not provided on the upper lid 924 and the stepped portion of the step surface 922c, which are not shown. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface having a slight downward tendency, and is formed so as to have an irregular or wave-like repeating shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape, similarly to the step surface 922c. According to such a step surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, since it becomes easy to swing in the lateral direction when the game ball B proceeds from the upper stage to the lower stage from the upper stage to the lower stage, the time to the lower stage will be prolonged, The progressing speed of the game ball B can be decelerated more effectively.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b not shown. At the bottom of such a main stage 922, an inclined support surface 922f is provided, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as shown by a phantom line in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position on the rear while in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front. Then, the step surface 922c also has a relatively steep downward inclination, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B that were on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time. As a mechanism for tilting the main stage, a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied.

[Effect of game machine of the fourth modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modification, the variable winning device capable of over winning can be configured with simpler parts and structures, and the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost can be effectively suppressed. it can.

Another Example of Fourth Modified Example
Next, a variable winning prize apparatus according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the 4th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ', and FIG. 85 is a view schematically illustrating the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 83 and 84, there is shown a form in which the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ') of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In practice, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain amount of clearance.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is integrally formed with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape along the left-right direction, and has a step surface 922c which is a slightly downward slope. A shutter surface 922 b is integrally formed at the front end (front) 922 a of the step surface 922 c. The stepped surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed to have the same dimensions in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the above-described upper cover 924 but does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the step surface 922c in the closed state, and after the main stage 922 from the lead portion 920c. It has a guiding path 924b for guiding the gaming ball B to the upper end of the step surface 922c by turning around the end. The rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b is disposed above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space 924g communicating with the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further to the rear of the rear end portion 924f. There is. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the guiding path 924b falls onto the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Between the front end 922a of the step surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), even when the main stage 922 is not only in the open state but in the closed state, it is played from the step surface 922c through the front end 922a to the shutter surface 922b A relatively large gap through which the ball B can pass is provided. Thereby, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B can be smoothly guided from the step surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930 to the shutter surface 922b without any problem.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B in the suppressing portion 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) from the upper stage to the lower stage along the step surface 922c and finally To the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front, the step surface 922c is also inclined relatively sharply downward to the front, and the shutter surface 922b has an opening not shown. Move downward to 920a. As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B that were on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time. The variable winning device provided with such a main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 'can also obtain the same effect as that of the above-described fourth modification.

<Fifth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fifth modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 3rd modification and 4th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Also in the variable winning prize device according to the fifth modification, the main stage 922 is mainly different from that according to the third modification. The variable winning prize apparatus according to the fifth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The main stage 922 of the fifth modification is formed up to the portion of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c 'which is uniformly inclined downward. Nothing is particularly provided on the inclined surface 922c '. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c 'on the surface opposite to the inclined surface 922c'. The cut wall 924c 'is bent to the left and right for moving the game ball B from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c' when the main stage 922 is in a posture to close the big winning opening 37. Forming a passageway 930 '. On the partition wall 924c ', a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. When moving the gaming ball B downward along the inclined surface 922c 'by the passage 930' having such a convex portion 924e, the suppression portion for decelerating and suppressing the advancing speed by meandering to the left and right Is formed. That is, the game ball B meanders to the left and right as it travels from the upper side to the lower side according to the passage 930 'bent to the left and right, so the time to the lower end of the inclined surface 922c' will be prolonged accordingly The traveling speed of B can be decelerated more effectively.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c 'is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b not shown. An inclined support surface 922f is also provided at the bottom of such a main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as shown by a phantom line in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position on the back while in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front. Then, the front surface 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c 'is in a steeper posture where it descends forward. At this time, the distance between the inclined surface 922c 'and the partition wall 924c' becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924c 'can not inhibit the progression of the game ball B. As a result, the bent passage 930 'is eliminated, and the plurality of gaming balls B on the inclined surface 922c' are promptly led to the big winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effect of game machine of the fifth modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modification, the variable winning device capable of over winning can be configured with simpler parts and structures, and the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost can be effectively suppressed. .

<Another example of the fifth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the 5th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ', and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . In FIGS. 88 and 89, the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ') of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In practice, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain amount of clearance.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in substantially the same flat shape as that of the fifth modification described above, and the upper surface thereof is disposed as a downward sloping inclined surface 922c '. The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922 b. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 89 also has no plate-like member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c ′, and wraps around from the introduction portion 920c to the upper end of the rear end of the main stage 922, and the upper appropriate part of the inclined surface 922c ′ It has a guiding path 924 b for guiding the gaming ball B to it. In addition, the upper unit 924 'has a plurality of partition walls 924c' at a portion facing the inclined surface 922c '. The cut wall 924c 'forms a left and right bent passage 930' for meandering when the game ball B moves from the top to the bottom along the inclined surface 922c 'when the main stage 922 is in the closed state. ing. On the partition wall 924c ', a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. By such a passage 930 ', a suppressing portion is formed which guides the traveling speed so as to decelerate and suppress the traveling speed while meandering the gaming ball B laterally downward along the inclined surface 922c'. Between the outlet 930a 'of the passage 930' and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), it is guided to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c 'even when the main stage 922 is not only open but also closed. A relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided. Thus, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B can be smoothly guided from the inclined surface 922c 'to the shutter surface 922b along the passage 930' without any problem.

  As shown in FIG. 90A, when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B on the inclined surface 922c 'moves along the passage 930' so as to meander from the top to the bottom, and the final The light beam passes through an opening 920a (not shown) and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The main stage 922 is supported at its rear end via a shaft 921a inserted into the vertically elongated hole 921d of the back base member 921 and can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, it is relatively tilted by tilting around the axis 921a displaced downward along the vertically elongated holes 921d. It has a steep forward and downward inclination. That is, the inclined surface 922c 'also has a posture that becomes steeper than in the state of FIG. 90A, and the shutter surface 922b moves below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B on the inclined surface 922c 'are separated from the partition wall 924c' and the passage 930 'is eliminated, so the plurality of gaming balls B become large at once along the inclined surface 922c'. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Also with the variable winning device provided with such main stage 922 and upper unit 924 ', it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above-described fifth modification.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the special winning opening shutter or shutter surface protrudes or retracts in the front-rear direction or tilts in the front-rear direction, but sliding in the left-right direction opens or closes the special winning opening, or around the vertical axis The big winning opening can be opened and closed by opening and closing the big winning opening by turning, or arranging two big winning opening shutters in parallel, and expanding the interval between the two big winning opening shutters at the time of opening. May be

  Further, the surface shape of the large winning opening shutter or shutter surface may be a sawtooth rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely disposed on the entire surface. According to this, it is possible to decelerate the advancing speed of the gaming ball more effectively.

  In the above embodiment, the special winning opening has a characteristic configuration. For example, the same special winning opening shutter as that described above or the shutter surface is applied to a blade member as an ordinary electric winning combination, and the start opening is over. It is also possible to enable winning or control corresponding to this.

  The "deceleration" of the progressing speed of the gaming ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment means that the gaming ball is also stopped.

  As another example of the third to fifth modifications, the entire area covered by the members (the upper stage and the main stage, etc.) constituting the stage may be set as the big winning opening.

  When a plurality of large winning openings are provided, the prescribed number of winnings may be varied for each large winning opening, or the number of winning balls may be varied. For example, as another example of the second modification, for the first large winning opening, the prescribed number of winnings per round is five, the number of winning balls per winning is five, etc., and the second large winning opening For example, the prescribed number of winnings per round may be 10, the number of winning balls per winning may be 15, or the like.

  In the case of achieving a prize exceeding the prescribed prize number by the interpal during the round, for example, the following opening / closing pattern in which the estimated prize number at the first opening and the estimated prize number at the opening after closing the round are changed May be provided. Specifically, in the case where the prescribed number of winnings per round is 10, an opening / closing pattern such that the estimated number of winnings at the first opening is eight and the estimated number of winnings at the later opening is four, and the first opening In some cases, an open / close pattern may be provided such that the estimated number of winnings is six and the estimated number of winnings is six at the time of opening later. According to such an open / close pattern, it is possible to realize a specification in which the process of the over winning itself is different although the number of over winnings is the same.

  In addition, the launch timing with which the winning number can be expected may be notified each time the big winning opening is closed before the round game is performed. As a result, even if the firing operation is stopped halfway in the big hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous because the over winning can not be realized.

  In addition, as for notification of the scheduled grant quantity, when a plurality of big winning openings are opened in one big hit gaming state, the number corresponding to each big winning opening may be notified. For example, the total of the planned grant quantity is "2500", and the planned number of prize balls based on the winning of the first big winning opening is "1500", and the planned prize of the number based on the winning of the second big winning opening If "1000" is the predetermined prize ball number pertaining to the first large winning opening "1500", the notification to display the scheduled number ball number pertaining to the second large winning opening "1000" Can.

  As a modified example of the small hitting probability, for example, either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, the one with a low probability of small hit includes one not winning in small hit (winning probability 0%). In addition, there is no possibility that a person with a high probability of winning a small hit will not win a small hit, but may be a probability that all wins except for a big hit will be won. For example, when the update range of the random numbers for collision determination is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

  As a modification of the lottery (ordinary symbol game lottery) related to the opening of the second starting port, the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch in one or both of the non-time-short game state and the time-short game state Even if this is done, it may be decided whether or not to open uniquely, without performing a lottery relating to the opening. For example, in the non-time-saving game state, it may be always opened without a lottery, and may be opened without a lottery in a time-saving game state. In the case where only one of the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is determined to be unlottery, if the person who falls under the non-lottery is the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is opened by lottery. If the person who falls under the no-lottery state is the short-time game state, it may be provided with the case where it becomes non-opening in the lottery in the non-time-short game state. That is, the probability that the time saving game state is relatively open will be higher than the non-time saving game state. In addition, for the opening pattern of the wing member, two or more types are provided, for example, 1 time × 1 time opening, 2 seconds × 2 time opening, etc., and a plurality of opening patterns A lottery may be made as to which open pattern to use.

  When the variation example of the lottery related to the small hitting probability and the opening of the second starting opening described above is applied to each embodiment described above, for example, if the number of predetermined winnings in the small hitting is two, the big winning opening before opening. By the interval between rounds or the interval during rounds between the opening of the big winning opening, it is possible to realize three or more over winnings exceeding the prescribed winning number even in the small hitting. For example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and in the non-time-saving game state, it is not opened in the non-lottery game In such a case, in the time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls by small hits, and it is possible to further develop gameplay. In addition, when the big hit probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the lost probability is 254/256, it is in the interval between rounds before the big winning opening is open or between the big winning opening. The interval during the round enables three or more over wins that exceed the prescribed number of wins even with a small number of small hits.

  As a display related to the special winning opening shutter and winning, for example by providing a ball detection sensor in the vicinity of the left end and near the right end, notification of the expected number of winnings per round and the actual number of winnings by meter display or numerical display in bar graph You may do it. For example, during a predetermined period until the special winning opening is released, when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor on the right end side, the expected winning number is added and updated by meter display or numerical display, while ball detection on the left end side When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected number of winnings is updated by the meter display or the numerical display, and when the special winning opening is opened, the finally updated numerical value is presented according to the numerical value. For example, display effects such as “maximum winning !!”, “middle winning!” Or “small winning” may be performed.

  A plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) may be provided in one big winning opening.

  The special winning opening may be provided with a specific area inside, and when the gaming ball passes through the specific area in the big hit gaming state, it may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state.

  The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines including pachislot machines, roulette machines, or slot machines as gaming machines.

  Further, it goes without saying that those according to the above-described embodiment and modification can be combined as appropriate.

  Based on the above-mentioned embodiment or modification, the basic composition of the present invention is listed below.

(Appendix A1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which game media (game balls) can roll;
A passing area (large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Displacement members (large winning opening shutter 37A, main stage 922) displaceable in the first mode (opened state) and the second mode (closed state) in which the passage of game media is facilitated with respect to the passage area. And
The displacing member has a suppressing portion (suppressing portions 430 and 930) capable of suppressing the advancing speed of the inflowing game medium.
The suppression unit is
When the displacing member is in the second mode, it is located at a first position (open position) where the advancing speed of the game medium flowing into the displacing member can be suppressed,
When the displacing member is in the first mode, the displacing member is located at the second position (closed position) which does not suppress the advancing speed of the game medium flowing into the displacing member than when it is located at the first position. Gaming machine.
(Appendix A2)
The suppressing portion has a portion that becomes lower as it moves from one end to the other end when the displacement member is in the second mode, and supports a game medium from below (a large winning opening shutter 37A Upper surface, step surface 922c of main stage 922, inclined surface 922c ')
The passage area is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein a guide path (a second guide rail 30 ′, a guide path 924b) capable of guiding a game medium to one end of the support surface in the suppression unit is formed.
(Appendix A3)
The gaming board has a penetrating portion (penetrating portion 1c) which reaches the back surface from the gaming area,
The displacement member is disposed in the penetration portion such that at least a part of the suppression portion is located on the back side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2, further comprising an introductory portion (introduction portion 920c) for guiding gaming media in the gaming region to the suppressing portion located on the back side of the gaming region.
(Appendix A4)
The suppressing portion is formed in a concavo-convex shape along a first horizontal direction (left-right direction), and formed in a step-like shape along a second horizontal direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the first horizontal direction The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3 characterized in that:
(Appendix A5)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media to the game area;
A start passing area (a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33) which is provided separately from the passing area in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that game media has passed the start passing area;
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (prescribed number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the passage area,
The displacement member can allow a predetermined number of game media to flow when in the second mode,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is a second mode of the displacement member before executing the advantageous game (interval time between rounds) by a specific number of game media by the launch means. It can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the specific time has passed, the game media having flowed into the displacement member passes the passage region, thereby defining the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game It can be more than a few
In the specific gaming state, the number of awarding of the gaming value (the number of winning balls) awarded by the gaming value awarding means per one of the gaming media having passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means The scheduled granting amount of the gaming value in the specific gaming state (the scheduled number of rounds) and the scheduled number of passing gaming media (estimated number of winnings) that may pass through the passing area according to the specific time Scheduled grant quantity determination means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the winning ball number),
A notification unit (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provisioned quantity determined by the planned provisioned quantity determination unit according to any one of appendices A1 to A4 Gaming machine.
(Appendix A6)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media to the game area;
A start passing area (a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33) which is provided separately from the passing area in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that game media has passed the start passing area;
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (prescribed number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the passage area,
The displacement member can allow a predetermined number of game media to flow when in the second mode,
The advantageous game execution means becomes the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be ejected by the ejection means and to pass through the second passage area during the execution of the advantageous game. After making the displacement member into the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) being the second mode The interval time can be controlled such that a second number of game media, the sum of which with the first number exceeds the specified number, will be the time taken by the launching means to flow into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has passed, the game medium having flowed into the displacement member passes the passage region, thereby causing the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game to pass. It can be more than the specified number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of awarding of the gaming value (the number of winning balls) awarded by the gaming value awarding means per one of the gaming media having passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means Gaming value in a specific gaming state based on the number of times of execution (the number of rounds) and the expected number of passing gaming media (estimated number of winnings) that may pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time Scheduled assigned quantity determining means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the scheduled assigned quantity (scheduled prize ball number) of
A notification unit (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provisioned quantity determined by the planned provisioned quantity determination unit according to any one of appendices A1 to A4 Gaming machine.

(Appendix B1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) on which game media (game balls) can roll;
A passing area (large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A displacement member (main stage 922) displaceable in a first mode in which the passage of game media is facilitated with respect to the passage area and a second mode in which passage of the game medium is difficult;
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, it can be positioned at a first position relative to the displacement member, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, And a passage forming member (upper lid 924, upper unit 924 ') which can be located in two positions;
The passage forming member is
When located at the second position, it is possible to form a passage (passage 930) capable of suppressing the advancing speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member together with the displacement member,
When positioned at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the progressing speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed more than when positioned at the second position. Is possible and
A gaming machine characterized in that when at least a part of the passage is not formed, gaming media having flowed into the displacement member can be guided to the passage area.
(Appendix B2)
The displacement member is provided with a portion which becomes lower as it moves from one end to the other end in the second mode, and a support surface (inclined surface 922c 'of the main stage 922) supporting the game medium from below. Have
The passage area is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, game media can roll along the passage from one end of the support surface to the other end,
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, the gaming medium can roll without being along the path from one end to the other end of the support surface. .
(Appendix B3)
A game medium which rolls along the passage when the displacement member is in the second mode is provided with a discharge port (recovery port 921c) which can be discharged out of the passage before being guided to the passage area. The gaming machine according to appendix B2, characterized in that:
(Appendix B4)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media to the game area;
A start passing area (a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33) which is provided separately from the passing area in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that game media has passed the start passing area;
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (prescribed number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the passage area,
The displacement member can allow a predetermined number of game media to flow when in the second mode,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is a second mode of the displacement member before executing the advantageous game (interval time between rounds) by a specific number of game media by the launch means. It can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the specific time has passed, the game media having flowed into the displacement member passes the passage region, thereby defining the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game It can be more than a few
In the specific gaming state, the number of awarding of the gaming value (the number of winning balls) awarded by the gaming value awarding means per one of the gaming media having passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means The scheduled granting amount of the gaming value in the specific gaming state (the scheduled number of rounds) and the scheduled number of passing gaming media (estimated number of winnings) that may pass through the passing area according to the specific time Scheduled grant quantity determination means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the winning ball number),
The notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the aforementioned plan provision quantity determination means, according to any one of appendices B1 to B3 Gaming machine.
(Appendix B5)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media to the game area;
A start passing area (a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33) which is provided separately from the passing area in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that game media has passed the start passing area;
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (prescribed number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the passage area,
The displacement member can allow a predetermined number of game media to flow when in the second mode,
The advantageous game execution means becomes the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be ejected by the ejection means and to pass through the second passage area during the execution of the advantageous game. After making the displacement member into the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) being the second mode The interval time can be controlled such that a second number of game media, the sum of which with the first number exceeds the specified number, will be the time taken by the launching means to flow into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has passed, the game medium having flowed into the displacement member passes the passage region, thereby causing the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game to pass. It can be more than the specified number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of awarding of the gaming value (the number of winning balls) awarded by the gaming value awarding means per one of the gaming media having passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means Gaming value in a specific gaming state based on the number of times of execution (the number of rounds) and the expected number of passing gaming media (estimated number of winnings) that may pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time Scheduled assigned quantity determining means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the scheduled assigned quantity (scheduled prize ball number) of
The notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the aforementioned plan provision quantity determination means, according to any one of appendices B1 to B3 Gaming machine.

(Appendix C1)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media (game balls);
A gaming board (playing board 1) having a gaming area (playing area 1p) on which gaming media launched by the launching means can roll;
A first passing area (a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the second passing area;
A displacement member (big winning opening shutter 37A, second) which can be displaced between the first mode (opened state) for facilitating the passage of gaming media with respect to the second passing area and the second mode (closed state) where it becomes difficult. Large winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the advancing speed of the game media flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the progression of game media flowing into the displacement member A suppression unit (suppression unit 430) which does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area ,
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (predetermined number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the second passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be introduced.
The advantageous game execution means, in the specific gaming state, the number of game media exceeding the specified number for the specified time (interval time between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game The game machine, characterized in that it is controllable so that it is time to be fired by the launching means and to flow into the displacement member.
(Appendix C2)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
And a variable member (first big winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the passage of gaming media is facilitated with respect to the third passing area and the second mode in which it is difficult.
The gaming value giving unit is capable of giving a gaming value on condition that gaming media has passed through the third passing area,
The advantageous game execution means is
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least once a first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific gaming state;
And second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific gaming state.
After executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game in the specific gaming state, the other can be executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means is terminated on condition that a prescribed number of gaming media have passed through the third passage area.
(Appendix C3)
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which the specific time before executing at least one advantageous game is a first specific time,
The game machine according to appendix C1, including a second specified gaming state in which the specified time before execution of at least one advantageous game is a second specified time which is longer than the first specified time.
(Appendix C4)
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values provided (the number of prize balls) provided by the game value giving means per one of the game media having passed through the second passing area, and executed by the advantageous game execution means Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned number of game media that can pass through the second passage area according to the specified time (estimated number of winnings), the planned game value in the specified gaming state Planned amount determination means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the amount to be granted (the number of scheduled prize balls);
Appendix C3: The gaming machine according to appendix C3, comprising: notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the estimated amount to be allocated determined by the estimated amount determination means.

(Appendix D1)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media (game balls);
A gaming board (playing board 1) having a gaming area (playing area 1p) on which gaming media launched by the launching means can roll;
A first passing area (a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the second passing area;
A displacement member (big winning opening shutter 37A, second) which can be displaced between the first mode (opened state) for facilitating the passage of gaming media with respect to the second passing area and the second mode (closed state) where it becomes difficult. Large winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the advancing speed of the game media flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the progression of game media flowing into the displacement member A suppression unit (suppression unit 430) which does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area ,
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (predetermined number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the second passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be introduced.
The advantageous game execution means becomes the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be ejected by the ejection means and to pass through the second passage area during the execution of the advantageous game. After making the displacement member into the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) being the second mode The interval time can be controlled such that a second number of game media, the sum of which with the first number exceeds the specified number, will be the time taken by the launch means to be discharged into the displacement member. A game machine characterized by
(Appendix D2)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
And a variable member (first big winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the passage of gaming media is facilitated with respect to the third passing area and the second mode in which it is difficult.
The gaming value giving unit is capable of giving a gaming value on condition that gaming media has passed through the third passing area,
The advantageous game execution means is
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least once a first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific gaming state;
And second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific gaming state.
After executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game in the specific gaming state, the other can be executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means is ended on condition that a prescribed number of gaming media have passed through the third passage area.
(Appendix D3)
The specific gaming state is
A first specified gaming state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is a predetermined time,
The game machine according to appendix D1, including a second specific gaming state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is longer than the predetermined time.
(Appendix D4)
The specific gaming state is
After making the displacement member the first mode for the first time in the at least one advantageous game, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time which is the second mode is The displacement member may be controlled so that it is time for the second number of game media to be ejected by the launcher and flow into the displacement member, and the displacement member is the one before the execution of at least one advantageous game. It is characterized in that it includes a specific gaming state that can be controlled such that the time of two modes is the time for which the number of gaming media exceeding the specified number is shot by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or D3.
(Appendix D5)
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values provided (the number of prize balls) provided by the game value giving means per one of the game media having passed through the second passing area, and executed by the advantageous game execution means Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned number of game media that can pass through the second passage area according to the first time and the second time (estimated number of winnings), a specific game Planned grant quantity deciding means (sub CPU 71) for deciding the scheduled grant quantity (plan prize ball number) of the game value in the state;
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, further comprising informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned additional amount determined by the predetermined additional amount determining means.

(Appendix E1)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media (game balls);
A gaming board (playing board 1) having a gaming area (playing area 1p) on which gaming media launched by the launching means can roll;
A first passing area (a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout apparatus 83) capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the second passing area;
A displacement member (big winning opening shutter 37A, second) which can be displaced between the first mode (opened state) for facilitating the passage of gaming media with respect to the second passing area and the second mode (closed state) where it becomes difficult. Large winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the advancing speed of the game media flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the progression of game media flowing into the displacement member A suppression unit (suppression unit 430) which does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area ,
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (predetermined number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the second passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be introduced.
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is a second mode of the displacement member before executing the advantageous game (interval time between rounds) by a specific number of game media by the launch means. It can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the specific time has passed, the game medium having flowed into the displacement member passes the second passage region, thereby passing the second passage region in the advantageous game The number can be more than the specified number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values provided (the number of prize balls) provided by the game value giving means per one of the game media having passed through the second passing area, and executed by the advantageous game execution means Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned number of game media that can pass through the second passage area according to the specified time (estimated number of winnings), the planned game value in the specified gaming state Planned amount determination means (sub-CPU 71) for determining the amount to be granted (the number of scheduled prize balls);
And a notification unit (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the plan provision quantity determination unit.
(Appendix E2)
A launcher (launcher 26) capable of launching game media (game balls);
A gaming board (playing board 1) having a gaming area (playing area 1p) on which gaming media launched by the launching means can roll;
A first passing area (a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (large winning opening 37, second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout apparatus 83) capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the second passing area;
A displacement member (big winning opening shutter 37A, second) which can be displaced between the first mode (opened state) for facilitating the passage of gaming media with respect to the second passing area and the second mode (closed state) where it becomes difficult. Large winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the advancing speed of the game media flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the progression of game media flowing into the displacement member A suppression unit (suppression unit 430) which does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific gaming state transition determining means (main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area ,
Specific gaming state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to the specific gaming state on condition that the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means, and
An advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game etc.) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state at least once,
The advantageous game ends on condition that a prescribed number (predetermined number of winnings) of gaming media has passed through the second passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be introduced.
The advantageous game execution means becomes the time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the specified number, to be ejected by the ejection means and to pass through the second passage area during the execution of the advantageous game. After making the displacement member into the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) being the second mode The interval time can be controlled such that a second number of game media, the sum of which with the first number exceeds the specified number, will be the time taken by the launching means to flow into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has passed, the game medium having flowed into the displacement member passes the passage region, thereby causing the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game to pass. It can be more than the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game value awards provided by the game value award unit per game medium that has passed the passage area, and the number of times of execution of an advantage game executed by the advantage game execution unit, Planned granted quantity determination means for determining a planned granted quantity of gaming value in a specific gaming state based on the scheduled number of passes of gaming media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time;
A gaming machine comprising: notification means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned granted quantity determined by the scheduled granted quantity determining means.
(Appendix E3)
Notification quantity changing means (sub-CPU 71) capable of changing the quantity notified by the notification means within the range of the scheduled addition quantity determined by the scheduled addition quantity determination means;
And further
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the notification means can notify the quantity changed by the notification quantity changing means after notifying a part of the planned provision quantities. .
(Appendix E4)
A third passage area (first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
And a variable member (first big winning opening shutter 36A) that can be varied between the first mode in which the passage of gaming media is facilitated with respect to the third passing area and the second mode in which it is difficult.
The gaming value giving unit is capable of giving a gaming value on condition that gaming media has passed through the third passing area,
The advantageous game execution means is
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least once a first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific gaming state;
And second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific gaming state.
After executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game in the specific gaming state, the other can be executed,
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means ends on condition that a prescribed number of gaming media has passed through the third passage area, according to any one of appendices E1 to E3 The gaming machine described.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device (informing means)
26 Launch device (launch means)
30 'second guide rail (guideway)
32 1st starting port (starting passing area, 1st passing area)
33 2nd starting port (starting passing area, 1st passing area)
34 wing member 35 passing gate 36 first large winning opening (third passing area)
36A 1st big winning opening shutter (variable member)
37 Big winning opening, 2nd big winning opening (passing area, second passing area)
37A big winning opening shutter, second big winning opening shutter (displacement member)
41A outlet (outlet)
43 cover member 61 main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, advantageous game execution means)
71 Sub CPU (means for determining scheduled amount)
83 Payout Device (Game Value Assigning Means)
430 Suppressing part 90 Variable winning device 91 Cover member 920 Front base plate 920c Introduction part 921c Collection port (discharge port)
922 Main stage (displacement member)
922c Stair surface (support surface)
922c 'inclined surface (support surface)
924 Upper lid (passage forming member)
924 'Upper unit (passage forming member)
924b Taxiway 930 Inhibitor 930 'passage

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, on condition that game media has passed through the passage area;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means;
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which game media can be easily received and a closed state in which the game medium is more difficult to receive than the open state;
Effect pattern determination means for determining an effect pattern based on the specific gaming state to be transferred by the gaming state transfer means;
Effect execution means for executing an effect in the specific gaming state based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a round game to open and close the variable winning device a plurality of times,
The effect executing means is a scheduled award determined from among a plurality of types of scheduled award ball numbers at the start of the specific game state, regarding the display regarding the number of winning balls based on the winning on the variable winning device in the specific game state. After the initial display of the number of balls is performed, even after one round game is over, the initial display can be continued and displayed,
In the round game executed after executing the initial display, it is possible to execute a cumulative addition display effect of adding different scheduled award ball numbers to the initial display,
The cumulative addition display effect is a first cumulative addition display effect for adding a first scheduled award ball number, and a round game after the first cumulative addition display effect is executed, the first scheduled award ball A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a second cumulative addition display effect of adding a second scheduled prize ball number larger than the number.